CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition

Administrator Guide CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition July 2014 Version 4.1

Copyright 2009-2014 CTERA Networks Ltd. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means without written permission from CTERA Networks Ltd. Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on part of CTERA Networks Ltd. CTERA, C200, C400, C800, C800+, P1200, CloudPlug, NEXT3, Cloud Attached Storage, and Virtual Cloud Drive are trademarks, service marks, or registered trademarks of CTERA Networks Ltd. All other product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The products described in this document are protected by U.S. patents, foreign patents, or pending applications. Tip For legal information and for the end user license agreement, refer to Legal Information (on page 441) in this guide.

i Contents Introduction ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 About the CTERA Portal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 CTERA Provisioning------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 About This Guide --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 Contacting Technical Support ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 Getting Started ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 Browser Requirements -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 Logging in to the CTERA Portal ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 Using the CTERA Portal-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 The Navigation Pane ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 The Main Frame ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 The Status Bar ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 Navigating between Virtual Portals ---------------------------------------------------------------- 24 Accessing the Global Administration View ------------------------------------------------------- 25 Accessing Online Help --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 Logging Out ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings ----------------------------------------------------- 27 Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals ------------------------------------------------ 27 Managing the CTERA Portal License --------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Branding the CTERA Portal --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42 Configuring Global Settings -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46 Configuring Global Messaging Settings ----------------------------------------------------------- 48 Managing Certificates --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50 Customizing Global Email Notification Templates---------------------------------------------- 67 Configuring Virtual Portals ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75 Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings ---------------------------------------------------- 75 Overriding Global Branding Settings --------------------------------------------------------------- 76 Managing User Accounts --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81 Accessing the User Account Manager ------------------------------------------------------------- 82 Adding and Editing User Accounts ----------------------------------------------------------------- 83 Viewing User Accounts -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87

Contents Configuring Group Membership for User Accounts ------------------------------------------- 89 Provisioning User Accounts in Reseller Portals-------------------------------------------------- 91 Provisioning User Accounts in Team Portals ----------------------------------------------------- 96 Managing Devices for User Accounts -------------------------------------------------------------- 99 Managing Folder Groups for User Accounts ---------------------------------------------------- 100 Configuring User Accounts' Advanced Settings ------------------------------------------------ 100 Managing Cloud Drive Folders Owned by User Accounts ----------------------------------- 103 Configuring User Alerts ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 104 Viewing User Account Details ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 105 Generating Monthly Reports ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 107 Enabling/Disabling User Accounts ----------------------------------------------------------------- 108 Exporting User Accounts to Excel------------------------------------------------------------------ 108 Applying Provisioning Changes --------------------------------------------------------------------- 109 Deleting User Accounts ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 110 Using Directory Services ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 110 Managing User Groups ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 128 Managing Administrators ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 135 Accessing the Staff Administrator Manager ---------------------------------------------------- 136 Adding and Editing Staff Administrators --------------------------------------------------------- 137 Configuring Staff Administrator Alerts ----------------------------------------------------------- 138 Viewing Staff Administrators ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 140 Importing Staff Administrators from a File ------------------------------------------------------ 140 Deleting Staff Administrators ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 142 Accessing the Global Administrator Manager -------------------------------------------------- 142 Adding and Editing Global Administrators ------------------------------------------------------ 143 Configuring Global Administrator Alerts --------------------------------------------------------- 144 Viewing Global Administrators --------------------------------------------------------------------- 144 Deleting Global Administrators -------------------------------------------------------------------- 145 Configuring an IP-Based Access Control List ---------------------------------------------------- 145 Importing Global Administrators from a File --------------------------------------------------- 148 Customizing Administrator Roles ------------------------------------------------------------------ 150 Managing Device Configuration Templates -------------------------------------------------- 155 Accessing the Configuration Template Manager ---------------------------------------------- 156 Adding and Editing Device Configuration Templates ----------------------------------------- 157 Viewing Device Configuration Templates ------------------------------------------------------- 158 Working with Backup Sets --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 158 Selecting Applications for Backup ----------------------------------------------------------------- 171 Scheduling Automatic Cloud Backup ------------------------------------------------------------- 172 Restricting Throughput ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 175

Contents Selecting CTERA Portal Cloud Drive Folders for Synchronization -------------------------- 177 Marking a Firmware Image as the Current Firmware Image ------------------------------- 180 Configuring Automatic Firmware Updates ------------------------------------------------------ 181 Configuring the Automatic Template Assignment Policy ------------------------------------ 182 Setting the Default Device Configuration Template ------------------------------------------ 185 Duplicating Configuration Templates ------------------------------------------------------------- 186 Deleting Device Configuration Templates ------------------------------------------------------- 187 Managing Devices ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 189 Accessing the Device Manager --------------------------------------------------------------------- 190 Editing Device Settings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 191 Viewing Devices ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 193 Remotely Managing Devices and Their Files ---------------------------------------------------- 202 Remotely Performing Cloud Backup Operations on Devices ------------------------------- 202 Exporting Devices to Excel -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 204 Remote Wiping Mobile Devices-------------------------------------------------------------------- 205 Deleting Devices --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 206 Managing Folders and Folder Groups ---------------------------------------------------------- 207 Accessing the Folder Manager --------------------------------------------------------------------- 209 Adding and Editing Folders -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 211 Viewing Folders ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 212 Managing Folder Contents -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 215 Changing Passphrases for Accessing Backup Folder Contents ----------------------------- 225 Exporting Folders to Excel --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 226 Deleting Folders---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 226 Accessing the Folder Group Manager ------------------------------------------------------------ 227 Adding and Editing Folder Groups ----------------------------------------------------------------- 228 Viewing Folder Groups ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 230 Managing Cloud Drive Folders for Folder Groups --------------------------------------------- 231 Managing Backup Folders for Folder Groups --------------------------------------------------- 232 Changing Passphrases for Accessing Folder Group Contents ------------------------------- 233 Exporting Folder Groups to Excel ------------------------------------------------------------------ 234 Deleting Folder Groups ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 234 Managing Collaboration Projects ---------------------------------------------------------------- 235 Cloud Drive Folder Collaboration Overview ---------------------------------------------------- 235 Enabling Projects in a Team Portal ---------------------------------------------------------------- 236 Managing Project Collaboration Permissions -------------------------------------------------- 237 Creating Collaboration Projects -------------------------------------------------------------------- 239 Editing Collaboration Projects ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 243

Contents Viewing Collaboration Project Contents --------------------------------------------------------- 245 Managing Subscription Plans --------------------------------------------------------------------- 249 Understanding Snapshot Retention Policies ---------------------------------------------------- 250 Adding and Editing Subscription Plans ----------------------------------------------------------- 253 Viewing Subscription Plans -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 262 Setting/Removing the Default Subscription Plan ---------------------------------------------- 264 Exporting Subscription Plans to Excel ------------------------------------------------------------ 264 Applying Provisioning Changes --------------------------------------------------------------------- 265 Deleting Subscription Plans ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 265 Managing Add-ons ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 267 Adding and Editing Add-ons ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 268 Viewing Add-ons --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 273 Exporting Add-ons to Excel -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 273 Applying Provisioning Changes --------------------------------------------------------------------- 274 Deleting Add-ons -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 274 Managing Vouchers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 275 Adding Vouchers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 275 Viewing Vouchers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 277 Sending Vouchers by Email ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 278 Exporting Vouchers to Excel ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 278 Deleting Vouchers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 278 Managing Guest Invitations ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 281 Viewing Active Guest Invitations ------------------------------------------------------------------ 282 Deleting Active Guest Invitations ------------------------------------------------------------------ 284 Managing Virtual Portals -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 285 Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager ------------------------------------------------------------ 286 Adding and Editing Virtual Portals----------------------------------------------------------------- 287 Viewing Virtual Portals ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 288 Assigning Virtual Portals to Global Plans -------------------------------------------------------- 290 Adding Global Add-ons to Virtual Portals ------------------------------------------------------- 291 Exporting Virtual Portals to Excel ------------------------------------------------------------------ 293 Deleting Virtual Portals ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 293 Managing Servers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 295 Accessing the Server Manager --------------------------------------------------------------------- 296 Editing Server General Settings -------------------------------------------------------------------- 297

Contents Configuring a Server as a Catalog Node ---------------------------------------------------------- 298 Viewing Connected Devices ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 298 Monitoring Server Activity -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 299 Viewing Server Tasks --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 301 Viewing Servers' Statuses --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 304 Restarting Servers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 305 Managing Seeding Stations ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 306 Adding Seeding Stations ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 306 Viewing Seeding Stations ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 307 Deleting Seeding Stations --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 308 Managing Firmware Images ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 309 Uploading Firmware Images ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 310 Viewing Firmware Images --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 312 Marking a Firmware Image as the Current Firmware Image ------------------------------- 312 Deleting Firmware Images -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 313 Viewing Devices that Use a Specific Firmware Image ---------------------------------------- 313 Managing Storage Nodes -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 315 Adding and Editing Storage Nodes ---------------------------------------------------------------- 315 Viewing Storage Nodes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 349 Deleting Storage Nodes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 350 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) --------------------------------------------------- 353 Importing Folders Over NFS------------------------------------------------------------------------- 353 Exporting Folders -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 367 Monitoring the CTERA Portal --------------------------------------------------------------------- 371 Viewing the Status Dashboard --------------------------------------------------------------------- 371 Viewing Reports --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 375 Configuring Logging ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 389 Viewing Logs -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 392 Clearing Logs -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 407 Using CTERA Portal Email Notifications ---------------------------------------------------------- 407 Using Email Alerts ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 415 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures --------------------------- 421 Recovering from Hard Drive Failures ------------------------------------------------------------- 422 Recovering from Cloud Gateway Failures ------------------------------------------------------- 426 Recovering from Total Loss of a Cloud Gateway ----------------------------------------------- 432

Contents Legal Information ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 441 CTERA End User License Agreement -------------------------------------------------------------- 441 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE -------------------------------------------------------------------- 445 Apache License ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 448 PostgreSQL Database Management System (formerly known as Postgres, then as Postgres95) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 450 Index ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 451

1 Introduction This chapter introduces the CTERA Portal and this guide. In This Chapter About the CTERA Portal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 CTERA Provisioning ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 About This Guide --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 Contacting Technical Support ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 1

1 Introduction About the CTERA Portal CTERA Portal DataCenter Edition is a scalable cloud service delivery platform that you install at your own datacenter and use to create, deliver and manage cloud storage applications, including file sharing and sync, backup, and mobile collaboration. CTERA Portal is compatible with cloud storage infrastructure from multiple vendors, including EMC, HDS, IBM and AWS. CTERA Portal DataCenter Edition enables you to extend cloud services to remote sites and mobile users, via CTERA Cloud Gateways, CTERA Agents, and CTERA Mobile. The portal ensures data consistency, maintains version history and facilitates file sharing amongst users, regardless of their access method. CTERA employs both global source-based de-duplication and data compression. This ensures that only incremental data changes are transferred for storage in the cloud, and that data blocks are stored only once, which dramatically reduces storage capacity needs and overall network traffic. CTERA Portal DataCenter Edition enables you to create one or more tenants, called Virtual Portals, on a single set of physical servers. Virtual Portals are accessed by end users and management staff via web-based interfaces. CTERA cloud gateways and end-point agents are remotely managed with CTERA Portal using a single web-based console. Template-based management, centralized monitoring, customized alerting and remote software and firmware upgrade capabilities make it easy to manage cloud gateways of various types and sizes as well as individual end-point agents up to tens of thousands of connected devices with no need for on-site IT presence in remote locations. 2 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Introduction 1 Management Features With the CTERA Portal, you control all aspects of Cloud Attached Storage, including: Service Provisioning Create customer subscription plans that include cloud storage volume, pricing, number of devices per account, user self-provisioning, and time limits. Add-ons can be used to supplement existing accounts with additional services, and vouchers allow the creation of one-off promotions and pre-paid subscription plans. User Management Manage anywhere from tens to tens of thousands of subscribers. Control user access, subscription plans, and add-ons per user account, and view real-time storage usage and account status. Remote Device Management and Monitoring Manage CTERA cloud gateways and agents remotely. This enables you to view the device status in detail, including logged events, network status, storage volumes, and recent backups, as well as to set firmware upgrades, associated backup folders, and more. Real-Time Event Monitoring Centrally monitor and audit all events pertaining to the cloud service. Reporting CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 3

1 Introduction Run and export detailed reports on a variety of usage parameters, including storage usage, bad files, snapshot status, and more. Generate user reports that are automatically emailed as PDF attachments. Private Branding Brand all aspects of the end-user experience, customizing it to your own corporate identity. This includes the CTERA Portal user interface and all automated email notifications. Virtual Portals Installed at the CTERA Portal owner s datacenter, the CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition allows a CTERA Portal owner to create one or more virtual CTERA Portals on a single set of physical servers. The following types of virtual portal are supported: Reseller portal Designed for the needs of a reseller, this type of portal includes support for reseller-oriented features such as add-ons, plans, vouchers, and self-registration. The end users in the portal are the reseller's subscribers. Reseller portals are managed by staff administrators in the Staff Control Panel. For information on the Staff Control Panel, see CTERA Portal Interfaces and Users (on page 6). By default, each user uses a private folder group, enabling cooperative de-duplication between all devices owned by the user. Furthermore, when the cloud drive feature is used, each user receives a private cloud drive that is not accessible to other users. When multiple reseller portals are created, the CTERA Portal owner can rent each portal to a different reseller, as part of a multi-tenant or hierarchical business model. Each reseller can log in to their own virtual portal, manage their subscribers, and define subscription plans, branding, and pricing models. In contrast, the CTERA Portal owner can access and manage the contents of any reseller portal, as well as manage global settings across all virtual portals. Team portal This type of portal is designed for the needs of a company or team with multiple members, and as such does not include support for reseller-oriented features. The users in the portal are the team members. 4 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Introduction 1 Team portals are managed by team administrators, who are team members with the "Administrator role. These users can manage their team portal via the Administration tab in their End User Portal. For information on the End User Portal, see CTERA Portal Interfaces and Users (on page 6). All users in the team portal share, by default, a single folder group, enabling cooperative de-duplication between all members of the group. Furthermore, when the cloud drive feature is used, each user receives, by default, one personal folder, and can create multiple additional personal folders. Users can share personal folders. Each user also receives access to a projects folder that is visible to all the users in the portal. Users can create projects to collaborate with other team members. When multiple team portals are created, the CTERA Portal owner can assign each team portal to a different organizational unit within the company or team. Each organizational unit can log in to their own virtual portal and manage their settings. In contrast, the CTERA Portal owner can access and manage the contents of any team portal, as well as manage global settings across all virtual portals. Both reseller portals and team portals can be defined within a single CTERA Portal installation. Tip The CTERA Portal is also available in the SaaS Edition. Run by CTERA as a cloud service, the SaaS Edition allows CTERA Portal owners to offer managed cloud services, with no upfront investment. For further information, contact CTERA support. Storage Clients As part of the CTERA Cloud Attached Storage architecture, CTERA Portal can deliver cloud services to desktop, server, and mobile endpoints and to on-premises storage hardware. CTERA Portal connects to the following storage clients: CTERA Cloud Gateways (on page 6) CTERA Agents (on page 6) CTERA Mobile (on page 6) Throughout this guide, the term "device" refers generically to CTERA Cloud Gateways and CTERA Agents. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 5

1 Introduction CTERA Cloud Gateways CTERA's cloud gateways are hybrid appliances that seamlessly combine local storage, cloud storage, data protection functionality and collaboration capabilities in a single, cost-effective package. Ideal for SMBs as well as enterprise branches and remote offices, CTERA's cloud gateways can replace legacy file servers and tape backup in a single solution with significant cost savings. The cloud gateways feature a full set of Network Attached Storage (NAS) capabilities and comprehensive backup functionality, utilizing on-premises storage capabilities for speed and local sharing, while taking advantage of cloud storage for off-site backup, universal access, file sharing, and folder synchronization. CTERA cloud gateways are managed remotely by CTERA Portal. Template-based management and remote firmware upgrades make it possible to manage numerous cloud gateways while maintaining minimal on-site IT and reducing total cost of ownership. CTERA Agents CTERA Agents are small-footprint software agents that perform both cloud backup and file sync (FSS) functions. CTERA Agents can connect either directly to the cloud or to a CTERA cloud gateway. CTERA Agents are available for Windows, Linux and Mac platforms, and are licensed for either laptop/desktop use or for servers. In all cases they provide sync and backup capabilities, supporting both file backup and disk-level ("bare metal") backup. CTERA Agents can be managed remotely by CTERA Portal, where all aspects of backup, sync and agent setup can be monitored and configured from a single console, including software upgrades. CTERA Mobile CTERA Mobile for ios and Android enables business users to access their files securely, view them, edit them, and store them in the cloud where they can be shared with colleagues, partners and customers. Users can also easily upload files, such as photos and documents, from their mobile device to their cloud drives. CTERA Mobile works in tandem with CTERA Portal to provide access to private folders and team project workspaces, as well as the ability to view and download backup files. CTERA Portal Interfaces and Users The CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition includes the following interfaces: The End User Portal 6 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Introduction 1 This interface is used by end users to manage their devices, back up files, and access cloud-stored files. End User Portal users are called end users. When accessed by team administrators, the End User Portal includes an Administration tab with controls for managing the contents and settings of the team portal, instead of the My Account tab. The Staff Control Panel (available in reseller portals only) CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 7

1 Introduction This interface is used by a virtual portal owner's staff to manage the contents and settings of the reseller portal. Staff Control Panel users are called staff administrators. Only reseller portals have staff administrators and the Staff Control Panel. The Administration Control Panel This interface is used by a CTERA Portal owner's staff to manage the contents and settings of all virtual portals in the system. 8 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Introduction 1 Administration Control Panel users are called global administrators. This interface also includes the Global Administration View, a special sub-interface for managing global settings shared by all the defined virtual portals. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 9

1 Introduction Tip It is possible to limit a user or administrator's permissions, so that they cannot modify some or all of the settings in the relevant interface. CTERA Provisioning Provisioning is the process of assigning services and quotas to users or tenants. CTERA includes two levels of provisioning: Portal-level provisioning The CTERA Portal owner provisions each virtual portal owner with services and/or quotas. For example, it is possible to limit a virtual portal to use a total of up to 100GB of storage space and 50 workstation agents. Portal-level provisioning is performed by global administrators in the Global Administration View. End-user provisioning The virtual portal owner provisions end users with services and/or quotas, such as storage space, number of agents, and more. In reseller portals, end-user provisioning is performed by staff administrators in the Staff Control Panel or by global administrators in the Administration Control Panel. In team portals, end-user provisioning is optional and can be performed by team administrators in the Administration tab of the End User Portal, or by global administrators in the Administration Control Panel. Portal-level Provisioning The following provisioning methods are available for portal-level provisioning: Global plans In order to obtain services, virtual portals are assigned to a global plan which defines a set of services that the portal will receive, and which will subsequently be used by the portal's end users. Further, the plan can specify a maximum snapshot retention policy for the portal (see Understanding Snapshot Retention Policies (on page 250)). 10 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Introduction 1 Tip For reseller portals, the global plan limits the total amount of storage space (and other resources, such as server agents and workstation agents) allocated to a reseller portal's end users. That is, if a reseller provisions a 10GB storage quota to an end user, then 10GB of the reseller's storage space quota is consumed immediately, regardless of whether the end user actually uses the entire 10GB of storage space. Likewise, Portal Licenses are consumed when the resources are provisioned to the end user. For team portals, the global plan limits the total amount of resources used by end users. Portal Licenses are consumed immediately, when the team portal is provisioned. Global add-ons In addition to the global plan, one or more "global add-ons" can be added to portals. Each global add-on defines a set of services that portals will receive in addition to the services specified in the global plan. For example, an add-on may include an additional 10 GB of storage space for the number of devices specified in the global plan. Add-ons can be set to expire after a specified time period and can be stacked as desired. For example, a portal may have a subscription plan for 100 GB of storage, as well as two add-ons for 10GB of storage and one add-on for 5GB of storage. While the add-ons are valid, the portal will be entitled to allocate up to 125GB of cloud storage to end users. End-user Provisioning (Reseller Portals) User accounts need to be provisioned in order for end users to obtain services. This is done by setting the subscription plan, or adding add-ons to the user account. If a subscription plan or add-on is modified, all user accounts assigned to the plan or add-on is automatically updated with the changes. The following provisioning methods are available end-user provisioning in reseller portals: Subscription plans In order to obtain services, end users can be subscribed to a subscription plan. The subscription plan includes the list of services provided to the user and the quota for each service. The subscription plan also specifies a snapshot retention policy for the user's folders (see Understanding Snapshot Retention Policies (on page 250)). Add-ons In reseller portals, end users can subscribe to more services in addition to their subscription plan, by adding add-ons to the account. Each add-on defines a set of services that subscribed users will receive in addition to the services specified in the subscription plan. For example, an add-on may include an additional 10 GB of storage space for the number of devices specified in the subscription plan. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 11

1 Introduction Add-ons can be stacked as desired. For example, a user may have a subscription plan for 100 GB of storage, as well as two add-ons for 10GB of storage and one add-on for 5GB of storage. While the add-ons are valid, the user will be entitled to 125GB of cloud storage. Vouchers A reseller portal allows creating vouchers, which are prepaid coupons that encapsulate specific add-ons and plans. When a device owner redeems a voucher encoding an add-on, the add-on is added to the user s account. When a device owner redeems a voucher encoding a plan, they are assigned to the subscription plan. Tip Vouchers can also contain a hidden plan that is not exposed to end users. CTERA Portal allows you to mix and match these provisioning methods in order to obtain the combination that best suits your company's business model and your customer's needs. End-user Provisioning (Team Portals) In Team portals, end users must be subscribed to a subscription plan in order to obtain services. The subscription plan includes the list of services provided to the user and the quota for each service. Whereas in reseller portals a quota must be specified for each service, in Team portals, specific quotas can be unlimited, in which case the user account will only be limited by the quotas of the team portal itself. About This Guide This guide explains how to use the CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition. The procedures it contains are intended for both staff and global administrators, except where otherwise noted. Contacting Technical Support If you require assistance in configuring or using your CTERA Portal, contact technical support (http://www.ctera.com/support). 12 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

2 Getting Started This chapter contains all the information you need in order to get started using the CTERA Portal. In This Chapter Browser Requirements -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 Logging in to the CTERA Portal ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 Using the CTERA Portal -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20 The Navigation Pane ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 The Main Frame ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 The Status Bar ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 Navigating between Virtual Portals ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24 Accessing the Global Administration View ------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 Accessing Online Help --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 Logging Out ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 Browser Requirements In order to use the CTERA Portal, you will need one of the following internet browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later Mozilla Firefox 27 or later Apple Safari 6 or later Google Chrome 30 or later CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 13

2 Getting Started Logging in to the CTERA Portal Staff administrators are defined within the scope of a single reseller portal, and thus have access to that portal only. These administrators must log in to the relevant reseller portal via the Staff Control Panel. See Logging in to the Staff Control Panel (on page 14). Team administrators are both users and administrators of a single team portal. In the End User Portal, they can access their personal settings in the My Account tab, as well as administrative settings in the Administration tab. See Logging in to the End User Portal (on page 16). In contrast, global administrators have access to all virtual portals. These administrators may log in to any virtual portal via the Administration Control Panel. Once logged in, they can navigate to any other portal. See Logging in to the Administration Control Panel (on page 18). Tip If the portal is integrated with Active Directory, Active Directory users can use the UPN attribute or the samaccountname attribute as their username when logging into the portal. Logging in to the Staff Control Panel This task is relevant for reseller portals only. To log in to the Staff Control Panel 1 Using a Web browser, open http://<portaldns>/staff. Where <PortalDNS> is your CTERA Portal's DNS name. For example, if your portal's DNS name is "myportal.acme.com", you must open http://myportal.acme.com/staff. 14 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Getting Started 2 The CTERA Portal opens displaying the Staff Login page. 2 In the fields provided, type your user name and password. 3 Click Log In. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 15

2 Getting Started The Staff Control Panel opens displaying your portal's Main > Dashboard page. Logging in to the End User Portal This task is relevant for team portals only. To log in to the End User Panel 1 Using a Web browser, open http://<portaldns>/. Where <PortalDNS> is your CTERA Portal's DNS name. For example, if your portal's DNS name is "myportal.acme.com", you must open http://myportal.acme.com/. 16 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Getting Started 2 The CTERA Portal opens displaying the Login page. 2 In the fields provided, type your user name and password. 3 Click Log In. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 17

2 Getting Started The End User Portal opens. If you are an administrator, the Administration tab is displayed. Logging in to the Administration Control Panel To log in to the Global Administration View 1 Using a Web browser, open http://global.<portalsuffix> Where <PortalSuffix> is the CTERA Portal's DNS suffix. For example, to log in to the Global Administration View of a portal whose DNS suffix is "acme.com", you should open http://global.acme.com. Tip Alternatively, you can use the IP address of one of the CTERA Portal servers. For example, to connect to the Global Administration View of a portal whose server IP address is 192.168.10.10, open http://192.168.10.10. This method enables you to gain access to the Global Administration View, if the DNS service is not set up properly. After connecting, you can switch to any other portal as described in Navigating between Virtual Portals (on page 24). 18 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Getting Started 2 The CTERA Portal opens displaying the Administrator Login page. 2 In the fields provided, type your user name and password. 3 Click Log In. The Global Administration View opens displaying the Main > Dashboard page. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 19

2 Getting Started To log in to the Administration Control Panel for a specific virtual portal 1 Using a Web browser, open http://<portaladdress>/admin Where <PortalAddress> is the DNS name of the virtual portal to which you want to connect. For example, to connect to a virtual portal whose DNS name is "myportal.acme.com", you must open http://myportal.acme.com/admin. After connecting, you can switch to any other portal as described in Navigating between Virtual Portals (on page 24), or to the Global Administration View as described in Accessing the Global Administration View (on page 25). The CTERA Portal opens displaying the Administrator Login page. 2 In the fields provided, type your user name and password. 3 Click Log In. The Administration Control Panel opens displaying the Main > Dashboard page. Using the CTERA Portal CTERA Portal interfaces consist of the following elements Navigation pane. Used for navigating between pages in the CTERA Portal. 20 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Getting Started 2 Main frame. Displays the CTERA Portal pages, each of which contains controls and information. Status bar. Displays general and session-specific controls and information. The following figure displays these elements in the Staff Control Panel: The Navigation Pane The navigation pane includes several menu sections, each of which can be opened to reveal its contents. If desired, the navigation pane can be hidden, in order to expand the main frame. Opening Menu Sections In order to view the contents of a menu section in the navigation pane, you must open it. To open a menu section Do one of the following: Click on the section's name. Next to the section's name, click. The section opens, revealing its contents. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 21

2 Getting Started The Main Frame The main frame displays information and controls for the menu section you selected. When information is displayed in tables, you can sort the table according to a specific column and choose which columns should appear in the table. In addition, the main frame includes controls for refreshing its contents and quickly accessing the Home page. Sorting Tables You can sort a table according to a specific column, in ascending or descending order. To sort a table according to a column 1 Click on the desired column's heading. The table is sorted according to the column. An arrow in the column's heading indicates that the table is sorted according to the column. The arrow's direction indicates the sort order. In this example, the table is sorted according to the Date column, in ascending order. 2 To reverse the column's sort order, click on the column's heading again. The sort order is reversed. 3 To select the desired sort order from a list, do the following: a Mouse-over the column's heading. An arrow appears in the right side of the column heading. b Click on the arrow, then click on the desired sort order in the drop-down list. 22 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Getting Started 2 The column is sorted accordingly. Navigating between Table Pages When a table contains multiple pages of data, you can navigate between the pages by using the controls at the bottom of the screen. To navigate between pages Do any of the following: To navigate to the next page, click. To navigate to the previous page, click. To navigate to page 1, click. To navigate to a specific page, in the Page field, type the desired page number. Searching Tables If a search box appears above a table, you can search for specific items in the table. To search for items in a table 1 In the search box at the top-right corner of the main frame, type a string according to which you want to search. The CTERA Portal will look in all table columns for items that contain the specified string. The search is case-insensitive. For example, searching for "th" in the Users table could return the following results: JohnSmith, ThomasB, and MatthewJones. 2 If the Search drop-down list appears next to the search box, you can specify the scope of the search, by doing any of the following: To limit the search to specific parameters only, click the Search drop-down list, then select the check boxes next to the desired parameters and clear all other check boxes. To expand the search to all parameters, click the Search drop-down list, then select the Select All check box. 3 Click. The search results are displayed. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 23

2 Getting Started Refreshing Page Contents Some of the pages in the main frame contain a button that allows you to refresh the page's contents. To refresh a page's contents At the bottom of the main frame, click. The page's contents are refreshed. Accessing the Home Page The main frame contains a shortcut that enables you to quickly access the Home page from any other page in the CTERA Portal. To quickly access the Home page In the top-left corner of the main frame, click. The Home page appears. The Status Bar The status bar includes the following elements: Your user name A button for logging out of the CTERA Portal See Logging Out (on page 25). A button for accessing online help The firmware version A drop-down list for navigating between virtual portals (Administration Control Panel only) See Navigating between Virtual Portals (on page 24). Navigating between Virtual Portals Global administrators can navigate between virtual portals as needed. This task can be performed in the Administration Control Panel only. To navigate between virtual portals In the status bar, in the Portal drop-down list, select the virtual portal you want to access. The desired virtual portal's Main > Dashboard page appears. 24 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Getting Started 2 Accessing the Global Administration View Global administrators can access to the Global Administration View. This task can be performed in the Administration Control Panel only. To access the Global Administration View In the status bar, in the Portal drop-down list, select Administration. The Global Administration View appears displaying the Main > Dashboard page. Accessing Online Help To access online help In the status bar, click Help. Logging Out To log out of the CTERA Portal In the status bar, click Logout. You are logged out of the CTERA Portal. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 25

2 Getting Started Tip You will be automatically logged out after a period of inactivity. 26 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings This chapter explains how to configure global settings. These settings are shared across all virtual portals. The tasks in this chapter can be performed in the Global Administration View only. In This Chapter Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals ------------------------------------------------------------- 27 Managing the CTERA Portal License --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Branding the CTERA Portal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42 Configuring Global Settings -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46 Configuring Global Messaging Settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 48 Managing Certificates --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50 Customizing Global Email Notification Templates ---------------------------------------------------------- 67 Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals You can globally configure the default settings for virtual portals, such as: Whether end users in reseller portals can open a CTERA Portal account on their own, and the requirements for doing so Whether vouchers can be used by end users in reseller portals Whether the folders of users who have no quota should be automatically deleted after a period of time CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 27

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings These settings will be inherited by all virtual portals and can be optionally overridden per virtual portal. For information on overriding these settings on a per-virtual portal basis, see Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75). This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To configure global virtual portal settings 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Virtual Portal Settings. The Settings > Virtual Portal Settings page appears. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. 28 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 Table 1: Virtual Portal Settings Fields In this field... Do this... Password Policy Minimum Password Length Require password change every Type the minimum number of characters that must be used in a CTERA Portal account password. The default value is 7 characters. Select this option to require CTERA Portal users to change their password after a certain number of months, then specify the desired number of months in the field provided. When the specified number of months has elapsed, the user's password will expire, and they will be required to configure a new password upon their next login. Support Support Email Support URL Email Sender's Name Type the email address to which support requests should be sent. This email address will appear in the From field of all email notifications sent by the CTERA Portal system. Type the URL to which CTERA Portal users should browse for customer support. This URL will appear at the bottom screen in the End User Portal interface, as well as in all email notification templates. Type the email address that should appear in the From field of notifications sent to end users and staff by the virtual portals. For example: "CTERA Customer Service <support@ctera.com>". General Settings CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 29

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings In this field... Do this... Delete files of zero quota users after Select this option to specify that the storage folders of customers who have no quota (for example, customers with expired trial accounts) should be deleted automatically after a certain number of days, then specify the desired number of days in the field provided. Enabling this option helps free storage space. A notification is sent to the customer prior to deletion, prompting the customer to purchase cloud storage in order to avoid the scheduled deletion of their files. Storage folders of over-quota users with a non-zero quota will not be deleted. The default value is 14 days. Automatically create home folders Select this option to specify that one personal folder is automatically created for each new user account. This folder is given the home folder name entered in the Home Folder name field. Home Folder name Reseller Portal Settings Allow self-registration Require voucher Require email confirmation Require company The name of the personal folder created for each new user account. Relevant only if Automatically create home folders is enabled. These fields are relevant for reseller portals only. Select this option to allow end users to sign up for a CTERA Portal account, by surfing to the CTERA Portal and filling in a form. If this check box is cleared, the registration form will not appear in the CTERA Portal, and users will be defined only by an administrator. If selected, the Require voucher and Require Email Confirmation fields are enabled. Select this option to require end users to supply a valid voucher code when registering a new CTERA Portal account. Select this option to require end users to confirm their registration by email, in order for their CTERA Portal account to be activated. This is recommended, since it ensures that the user has entered a valid email address. Select this option to require end users to specify their company, when registering a new CTERA Portal account. 30 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In this field... Do this... Enable vouchers support Team Portal Settings Enable Projects Projects Folder name Enable Sharing of Personal Folders Sharing Folder name Select this option to enable the use of vouchers in the CTERA Portal. If this option is cleared, the Provisioning > Vouchers menu item will not appear in the navigation pane. See Managing Vouchers (on page 275). These fields are relevant for team portals only. Select this option to enable team portal members to create collaboration projects. The name of the folder in which team portal members can create project folders for collaboration. Relevant only if Enable Projects is selected. Select this option to enable team portal members to share personal folders with other team portal members. The name of the folder in each user's cloud drive folder hierarchy in which other users' personal folders that were shared with the user appear. Relevant only if Enable Sharing of Personal Folders is selected. Default Settings for New Folder Groups Use encryption Select this option to specify that the Encryption check box should be selected by default in all new folder groups' settings; that is, data in newly created folder groups will be stored in encrypted format by default. If encryption is not needed, and you want to improve performance, you can disable this option. Note: This value applies to new folder groups only and cannot be changed for existing folder groups. Note: Passphrase protection is only available in encrypted folders. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 31

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings In this field... Do this... Use compression Select this option to specify that data in newly created folder groups will be stored in encrypted format by default. The Compression check box will be selected by default in all new folder groups' settings. Clearing this option results in higher performance; however, more storage space will be used. Specify the default compression method used by new folder groups by selecting one of the following from the dropdown list: High Compression High Speed The default value is High Speed. Note: This value applies to new folder groups only and cannot be changed for existing folder groups. CloudFS1 Average Block Size Select the average block size used by new folder groups. The CTERA de-duplication engine splits each stored file into blocks. Increasing the Average Block Size causes the files to be split into larger chunks before storage, and results in increased read/write throughput at the cost of a reduced de-duplication ratio. Increased block size is useful for workloads that require high performance, as well as for those that do not gain greatly from de-duplication (for example, where the stored files consist mostly of videos, images, and music files that are not frequently modified). Decreasing the average block size results in better de-duplication, since the portal can better identify finer-grained duplicate data. Note: Changing this value does not affect existing folder groups. The new value applies to new folder groups only. The default value is 512KB. 32 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In this field... Do this... Average Map File Size Default Settings for New User Interface Language Backup Deduplication Level Type the average map file size used by new folder groups. CTERA Portal uses file maps to keep track of the blocks each file is made of. The Average Map File Size represents the maximum size of file that will be represented using a single file map object. For example, if the average map file size is set to 100MB, files of up to approximately 100 MB will have one file map, files of up to approximately 200MB will have two file maps, and so on. Reducing the average map file size causes more file maps to be created per file. This may result in smoother and less bursty streaming of files; however, it will also result in some extra overhead for creating, indexing, and fetching the additional file maps. Note: This value applies to new folder groups only and cannot be changed for existing folder groups. The default value is 640000 KB. Complete these fields for both reseller and team portals. Select the default language for new users. This language can be overridden by end users in the End User Portal. The following languages are supported: English, French, German, Hebrew, Italian, Polish, Spanish, and Portuguese. Specify the default de-duplication level to use for backup folders, for all new users. Select one of the following: User. Create a single folder group for each user account, containing all of the user account's backup folders. De-duplication is performed for the user account's folder group. This is the default value for both reseller and team portals. Portal. Create a single folder group for each virtual portal, containing all of the backup folders in the portalthis option is relevant for team portals only. Folder. Create a folder group for each of a user account's devices, containing all of the device's backup folders. De-duplication is performed separately for each of the user account's folder groups. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 33

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings In this field... Do this... Cloud Drive Deduplication Level Specify the default de-duplication level to use for cloud folders, for all new users. Select one of the following: User. Create a single folder group for each user account, containing all of the user account's cloud folders. De-duplication is performed for the user account's folder group. This is the default value for reseller portals. Portal. Create a single folder group for each virtual portal, containing all of the cloud folders in the portal. This option is relevant for team portals only. It is the default value for team portals. Folder. Create a folder group for each of a user account's devices, containing all of the device's cloud folders. De-duplication is performed separately for each of the user account's folder groups. Invitation Settings By default, invitation is valid for Protection Levels Public Link The default number of days for which an invitation to share a folder is valid. The end user must select a protection level when setting up an invitation to send. The end user can only select those protection levels that are enabled for the virtual portal. The protection level determines the method(s) applied to protect the invitation from being accessed by unintended recipients. You can enable any and all of the protection levels and you can choose which protection level is the default. If enabled, end users will be able to select Public Link as a protection level when sending an invitation to a folder or file. If set as default, Public Link will be the default protection level. A public link is a time limited link containing a secret access code to the folder or file. Public links can be freely forwarded by the recipient to any other person, and can also be posted on public websites and so on. 34 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In this field... Do this... Verify with Email Verify with Text Message Registered users If enabled, end users will be able to select Verify with Email as a protection level when sending an invitation to a folder or file. If set as default, Verify with Email will be the default protection level. Verify with Email applies two factor authentication. The recipient receives a time limited authenticated link to the file or folder. On every access, a new 6 digit passcode challenge is sent to the recipient by email. The recipient must enter the passcode before accessing the file or folder. This ensures that the invitation is not usable in case the invitation link is accidentally forwarded to another person, or posted on a public website. If enabled, end users will be able to select Verify with Text Message as a protection level when sending an invitation to a folder or file. If set as default, Verify with Text Message will be the default protection level. Verify with Text Message applies two factor authentication. The recipient receives a time limited authenticated link to the file or folder. On every access, a new 6 digit passcode challenge is sent to the recipient by text message. The recipient must enter the passcode before accessing the file or folder. This ensures that the invitation is not usable in case the invitation link is accidentally forwarded to another person, or posted on a public website. This option only appears if SMS messaging is enabled and configured in the global administration view. See Configuring Global Messaging Settings (on page 48). If enabled, end users will be able to select Registered users as a protection level when sending an invitation to a folder or file. If set as default, Registered users will be the default protection level. Registered users is the highest protection level. The recipient receives a time limited authenticated link to the file or folder and is required to authenticate to the portal using a valid username and password before accessing the file or folder. Remote Access Settings CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 35

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings In this field... Do this... Remote Access Redirection Specify whether Web clients attempting to remotely access a device should be redirected to communicate directly with the device, instead of relaying communications through the CTERA Portal. Select one of the following: Public IP Redirect. Redirect Web clients to the device's public IP address. Private IP Redirect. Redirect Web clients to the device's private IP address. No Redirect. Do not redirect communications between Web clients and the device. Relay all communications through the CTERA Portal. The default value is Private IP Redirect. Use HTTPS for remote access Select this option to use HTTPS for remotely accessing devices, using the remote access service. For example, if a device is named "dev1" and the portal is names "portal.mycompany.com", then enabling this option will cause the client's browser to be automatically redirected from the HTTP URL http://dev1.portal.mycompany.com to the HTTPS-secured URL https://portal.mycompany.com/devices/dev1. Managing the CTERA Portal License The CTERA Portal license limits the number of CTERA Appliance licenses, CTERA Workstation Backup licenses, CTERA Server Agent licenses, and Cloud Drive licenses, that can be provisioned throughout the CTERA Portal. The CTERA Portal includes a 30-day evaluation license that includes the following: 50 CTERA Appliance licenses 10 CTERA Workstation Backup licenses 10 CTERA Server Agent licenses 10 Cloud Drive licenses. Once this license has expired, or if you require additional licensing, you must install a new license key. These tasks can be performed in the Global Administration View only. 36 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 How the CTERA Portal License Works The CTERA Portal license specifies license quotas for each of the following CTERA Appliance Licenses This license quota specifies the number of CTERA Appliance licenses that can be provisioned. A CTERA Appliance license is consumed by a CTERA Cloud Gateway connected to a CTERA Portal user account. CTERA Server Agent Licenses This license quota specifies the number of CTERA Server Agent licenses that can be provisioned. A CTERA Server Agent is a CTERA Agent installed on a Windows or Linux Server. CTERA Workstation Backup Licenses This license quota specifies the number of CTERA Workstation Backup licenses that can be provisioned. A CTERA Workstation Backup allows Cloud Backup of a single desktop or laptop machine. Tip The CTERA Workstation Backup license includes the Cloud Backup Service only. For file sync and share services, a Cloud Drive license is required. CTERA Cloud Drive Licenses This license quota specifies the number Cloud Drive licenses that can be provisioned. Each CTERA Cloud Drive license allows the enabling of the Cloud Drive service for a single user account. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 37

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings This license is subdivided when you allocate quotas to virtual portals, by assigning the virtual portals to global plans and add-ons. For example, if the CTERA Portal license includes 20 appliance licenses, 20 workstation backup licenses, 20 server agent licenses, and 20 cloud drive licenses, and there are two virtual portals, you may choose to allocate half of the appliance, workstation backup, server agent, and cloud drive quotas to each virtual portal. In this case, each virtual portal will be allocated quotas for 10 appliances, 10 workstation backups, 10 server agents, and 10 cloud drives. With each virtual portal, the CTERA Portal license can be further subdivided, when quotas are allocated to user accounts via plans and add-ons. For example, if a virtual portal is allocated quotas for 10 appliances, 10 workstation backups, 10 server agents, and 10 cloud drives, and there are up to ten user accounts, the reseller portal owner may choose to define a plan that includes quotas for 1 appliance, 1 workstation backup, 1 server agent, and 1 cloud drive. These quotas are then allocated to the user accounts in the virtual portal. The following figure shows an example of what a CTERA Portal license might include and how its quotas might be divided. How Team Portals and Reseller Portals Differ Licenses are consumed in team portals and reseller portals in slightly different ways: In Team Portals: Any licenses provisioned to a specific team portal are immediately consumed from the Portal License. Within the team portal it is possible to optionally limit how many licenses or storage each user can consume, by assigning a plan to the user. 38 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In Reseller Portals: It is possible to optionally define a limit on the number of licenses and amount of storage consumed by each Reseller Portal, by assigning global plans and add-ons to the portal. However at this stage, no portal licenses are consumed. Portal licenses are consumed only when specific users within the reseller portal are provisioned with licenses. Adding License Keys This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To add a license key 1 Purchase a new license key from your CTERA authorized reseller, while specifying your portal's DNS suffix, and the number of required appliance, server agent, and workstation agent licenses. You can view your CTERA Portal's DNS suffix, in the Global Administration View's Settings > DNS page. You will receive one or more license keys. 2 In the navigation pane, click Settings > License. The Settings > License page appears. 3 Click Add license key. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 39

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings The Add License Keys dialog box opens. 4 Copy the license key you received from CTERA, and paste it into the text box. To add more than one key, paste each key on a new line. The system verifies and activates the license keys by contacting the CTERA Activation service. As each license key is activated, it is associated with this installation of CTERA Portal. 5 (Optional) Add a comment in the Comment field. The comment will be displayed in the License page. You can use this comment to document the purchase order number associated with the license, and the like. 6 Click Save. Removing License Keys This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To remove a license key 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > License. The Settings > License page appears. 2 Select the license key, and then click Remove license key. A confirmation message appears. 40 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 3 Click Yes. The license key is removed. Viewing CTERA Portal License Information This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view CTERA Portal license information In the navigation pane, click Settings > License. The Settings > License page appears with a list of installed license keys. For information on the fields displayed, see License Key Fields (page 41). The bottom of the page displays a summary of license usage for all installed keys. For information on the fields displayed, see License Usage Overview Fields (page 42). Table 2: License Key Fields In this field... Do this... Key Status The license key. The license key's status. This can be any of the following: OK. The license is valid. Expired on date. The license expired on the specified date. Expires in X days. The license will expire X days from now. Appliances Server Agents Workstation Backup Licenses Cloud Drives Comment The number of CTERA appliance licenses included in the license key. You cannot define more than the number of licensed appliances (cloud gateways) in the portal. The number of server agent licenses included in the license key. The number of workstation agent backup licenses included in the license key. This is the maximum number of workstation agents running the Cloud Backup service that you can connect to the portal. Workstation agents using Cloud Drive synchronization but not using Cloud Backup do not consume these licenses. The number of cloud drive licenses included in the license key. Cloud drive licenses are per portal user. There is no limit to the number of workstation agents that can synchronize to each user's cloud drive. Any comment about the license key that was entered when the key was added. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 41

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Table 3: License Usage Summary Fields In this field... Do this... Installed Licenses Usage Remaining The total number of appliance, server agent, workstation backup, and cloud drive licenses supported by the installed license keys. The total number of appliance, server agent, workstation backup, and cloud drive licenses that have been provisioned. The total number of appliance, server agent, workstation backup, and cloud drive licenses that have not yet been provisioned. Exporting License Keys to Excel You can export the list of installed license keys and their details to a Comma-Separated Values (*.csv) file on your computer, which you can open in Microsoft Excel. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To export license keys 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > License. The Settings > License page appears. 2 Click Export to Excel. The license keys are exported. Branding the CTERA Portal You can globally configure default branding settings for all virtual portals, by specifying a global skin with your company logo and color scheme, as well as a custom Login page. For information on overriding these settings on a per-virtual portal basis, see Overriding Global Branding Settings (on page 76). These tasks can be performed in the Global Administration View only. Creating Skins To create a skin 1 Request a basic skin from CTERA support. 2 Extract the ZIP file that you received. 3 Edit the HTML and CSS files as desired. 42 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 4 Replace the graphic files as desired. 5 Put the changed files back in the ZIP file. 6 Change the ZIP file's extension to.skin. Uploading Skins To upload a global skin 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Click Upload. The Skin Upload Wizard appears displaying the Select a file to upload dialog box. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 43

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 Click Upload and browse to the desired *.skin file. The skin is uploaded. At the end of the process, the Completing the Skin Upload Wizard screen appears. 4 Click Finish. Viewing Skins To view all global skins In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears displaying all skins. The currently applied global skin is marked with the virtual portals, expect where locally overridden. icon. This skin is used on all The table includes the following columns. Table 4: Skins Fields This field... Displays... Name Custom CSS Custom Login Page Size The skin's name. Indicates whether the skin includes a custom CSS stylesheet (Yes/No). Indicates whether the skin includes a custom Login page (Yes/No). The *.skin file's size. 44 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 Applying Skins When you apply a global skin, it is used as the default skin on all virtual portals. To apply a global skin to all virtual portals 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Select the desired skin's row. 3 Click Mark as Current. The selected skin is applied on all virtual portals in the system, except where locally overridden. It is marked with the icon. Removing the Current Skin Selection You can remove the current skin selection. This will cause all the virtual portals (for which the global skin is not overridden) to revert to using the default CTERA Portal branding. To remove the current skin selection 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Click Remove Current. The current skin selection is removed. Deleting Skins To delete a global skin 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Select the desired skin's row. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The skin is deleted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 45

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Configuring Global Settings You can configure the DNS suffix that will be appended to each virtual portal's name, in order to create the virtual portal's DNS name. For example, if a virtual portal's name is "myportal", and the DNS suffix is "acme.com", then the virtual portal's DNS name will be "myportal.acme.com". The DNS name is required in order to connect directly to a virtual portal. For example, in order to connect directly to a reseller portal whose DNS name is "myportal.acme.com": An end user must log in at http://myportal.acme.com. A reseller staff administrator must log in at http://myportal.acme.com/staff. A global administrator must log in at http://myportal.acme.com/admin. The global administrator may later switch to a different portal as described in Navigating between Virtual Portals (on page 24). If the remote access service is enabled, device users can remotely log in to the device at http://mydevice.myportal.acme.com. Tip If a global administrator connects to the host by IP address and not by DNS name (for example, http://1.2.3.4/admin), they will be connected to the Global Administration View. They can then navigate to their virtual portal of choice, as described in Navigating between Virtual Portals (on page 24). In addition, you can also configure the CTERA Portal time zone. These tasks can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To configure global settings 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Global Settings. 46 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 The Settings > Global Settings page appears. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. 4 If you changed the time zone, restart all the servers in the CTERA Portal cluster, in order for the change to take effect. Table 5: Global DNS and Time Zone Settings Fields In this field... Do this... DNS Suffix Timezone System Admin require password change every Type the global DNS suffix to use for all virtual portals. Select the CTERA Portal's time zone. Select this option to require the CTERA Portal administrators to change their password after a certain number of months, then specify the desired number of months in the field provided. When the specified number of months has elapsed, the administrator's password will expire, and they will be required to configure a new password upon their next login. Redirect HTTP request to HTTPS Select this option to enable automatic redirection of users from HTTP to HTTPS. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 47

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Configuring Global Messaging Settings You can configure global messaging settings that will be inherited by all servers. For information on overriding these settings on a per-server basis, see Editing Server Settings (see "Editing Server General Settings" on page 297). This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To configure global messaging settings 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Messaging. The Settings > Messaging page appears. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. 4 To validate SMTP mail server settings, click Test Email to send a test email. Verify that you receive the test mail at the email address defined in your administrator user account. 5 If you changed the SMTP settings, restart the portal servers in order for the changes to take effect. 48 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 Table 6: Messaging Settings Fields In this field... Do this... Enable Email Messaging SMTP Server SMTP Port Sender Email Enable TLS Server requires authentication Username Password Enable SMS Messaging Sender Email Destination Domain Select this option to enable sending email messages from the CTERA Portal to users. The SMTP Server, SMTP Port, and Sender Email fields are enabled. Type the outgoing mail server address for sending email messages from the CTERA Portal to users. Type the port number for sending email messages from the CTERA Portal to users. Type the email address that should appear in the From field of notifications sent to global administrators by the global portal. For example: "CTERA Customer Service <support@ctera.com>". Select this option to use Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption for sending email messages from the CTERA Portal to users. Select this option if the SMTP server requires authentication. The Username and Password fields are enabled. Type the user name that the CTERA Portal should use when authenticating to the SMTP server. Type the password that the CTERA Portal should use when authenticating to the SMTP server. Select this option to enable sending passcodes via text message to protect access to guest invitations. To effectively enable SMS messaging, you must register with an SMS gateway and then enter the sender email and destination domain in the fields below. SMS messaging must be enabled here in order for the option Verify with Text Message to appear among the protection levels in the Invitation Settings section of the Virtual Portal Settings page. For more information, see Virtual Portal Settings Fields (page 29). The sender email address registered with the SMS gateway. The DNS suffix of the sender email. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 49

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Managing Certificates Certificates are used as part of the Transport Level Security (TLS) protocol. They enable users' Web browsers, CTERA Cloud Gateways, and CTERA Agents to verify that the CTERA Portal server with which they are communicating is authentic and not spoofed. If the CTERA Portal does not have a valid certificate installed, CTERA Coud Gateways and CTERA Agents will not be able to connect to it. You must install an SSL certificate on the CTERA Portal in order to enable devices to connect to the CTERA Portal, and to prevent a security warning from being displayed when users attempt to access the CTERA Portal via HTTPS. The certificate must meet the following requirements: If multiple virtual portals are configured, then each virtual portal has its own DNS name. In this case, the SSL certificate should be a wildcard certificate, that is, the DNS name embedded in the certificate should start with "*". For example, if the CTERA Portal's DNS name is myportal.com, and there are two virtual portals, portal1.myportal.com and portal2.myportal.com, you should buy a wildcard certificate for *.myportal.com. If you have only one portal, and do not intend to configure multiple virtual portals, then it is sufficient to purchase a regular SSL certificate (not a wildcard certificate). For example, if your portal's DNS name is portal1.myportal.com, then you can buy a certificate for portal1.myportal.com. It is possible to specify multiple alternative names, using the subjectaltname certificate extension. The certificate should be in *.zip format and contain certificate files in *.pem format. You can automatically generate a certificate request to send to any public SSL certificate authority, such as Godaddy (recommended), Verisign, or Thawte (see Generating a Certificate Request). Once you have received a certificate from the certificate authority, you must the install it (see Installing an SSL Certificate (see "Install the Signed Certificate on CTERA Portal" on page 63)). Alternatively, you can export a certificate from another portal (see Exporting the Installed SSL Certificate (on page 66)) and install it on this portal (see Importing an SSL Certificate (on page 66)). Tip When generating a certificate request and installing the received certificate, the private key is generated on the portal and never leaves it. In contrast, when exporting and importing certificates, the private key is exported and imported along with the certificate, and it is therefore important to keep the exported file confidential. These tasks can be performed in the Global Administration View only. 50 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 Installing an SSL Certificate Perform the following steps to install a certificate on CTERA Portal: 1 Note your Portal's DNS Suffix (on page 51) 2 Obtain an SSL Certificate (on page 52) 3 Generate a Certificate Signing Request (on page 54) 4 Sign the Certificate Request (on page 60) 5 Validate and Prepare Certificates for Upload (on page 62) 6 Install the Signed Certificate on CTERA Portal (on page 63) Note your Portal's DNS Suffix Note your CTERA Portal's DNS suffix so that you have it for later steps. To view your portal's DNS suffix 1 In the navigation pane of the Global Administration View, click Settings > Global Settings. The Settings > Global Settings page appears. 2 The DNS Suffix field displays the CTERA Portal's DNS suffix. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 51

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Obtain an SSL Certificate It is necessary to obtain a valid certificate signed either by a well-known certificate authority, or by your own internal certificate authority. Tip If you intend to generate a signed certificate using your own internal certificate authority, please contact CTERA Support at http://www.ctera.com/support beforehand. The SSL certificate can be either of the following: A wildcard certificate A wildcard SSL certificate secures your website's URL and an unlimited number of its subdomains. For example, a single wildcard certificate for *.ctera.com can secure both company01.ctera.com and company02.ctera.com. A wildcard certificate is mandatory if you plan for your service to consist of more than one virtual portal. A domain certificate A domain certificate secures a single domain or subdomain only. For example: company01.ctera.com. 52 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 This option is relevant if you are planning to provision a single virtual portal only. Tip To obtain a self-signed certificate for testing and evaluation purposes only, contact CTERA Support at http://www.ctera.com/support and specify your CTERA Portal's DNS suffix see Obtain your Portal's DNS Suffix (see "Note your Portal's DNS Suffix" on page 51)). CTERA will generate a self-signed certificate for your DNS suffix and provide you with a ZIP file that you can upload to your CTERA Portal environment. Tip CTERA Portal also supports certificates with Subject Alternative Names (SAN certificates). This option enables you to secure multiple domain names with a single certificate. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 53

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Generate a Certificate Signing Request The next step is to generate a certificate signing request (CSR) for your domain using CTERA Portal. This requires a CTERA Portal Administrator account. To generate a certificate signing request for your domain 1 In the navigation pane of the Global Administration View, click Settings > SSL Certificate. The Settings > SSL Certificate page appears. 2 Click Request Certificate. 54 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 The Create a Certificate Request Wizard opens. 3 In the Domain Name field, type the domain name for which you would like to request a certificate. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 55

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings The value entered must match the type of certificate you chose to use. For example, if you chose a wildcard certificate, the domain name might be *.acme.com. 56 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In contrast, if you chose a domain certificate, the domain name might be company01.acme.com, where company01 is the name of your virtual portal. 4 Complete the rest of the fields using the information in the following table. These fields are optional 5 Click Generate. A keypair is generated and stored on the portal. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 57

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings The Download a certificate request screen appears. 6 Click Download. The certificate request file certificate.req is downloaded to your computer. The Settings > SSL Certificate page's Certificate Request area indicates that the certificate request is pending. If you issued a wildcard certificate request, the area appears as follows: If you issued a domain certificate request, the area appears as follows: 58 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 Warning When you generated the CSR, a private.key file was registered in the CTERA Portal. If you now generate a new CSR, it will override the existing private.key file, and signing the old CSR will result in an error message indicating that the CSR does not match the private.key file. Therefore, do not generate a new CSR before installing the signed certificate. Table 7: Create a Certificate Request Wizard Fields In this field... Do this... Domain Name Organizational Unit Organization City State Country Type the domain name for which you would like to request a certificate. If multiple virtual portals are configured, each virtual portal has its own DNS name. In this case, the SSL certificate should be a wildcard certificate, that is, the DNS name embedded in the certificate should start with "*". If you have only one portal, and do not intended to configure multiple virtual portals, then it is sufficient to purchase a regular SSL certificate (not a wildcard certificate). To request a certificate that specifies multiple alternative names, type the multiple names in this field, separated by semicolons. The certificate will include the subjectaltname certificate extension. Type the name of your organizational unit. This field is optional. Type the name of your organization. This field is optional. Type your city. This field is optional. Type your state. This field is optional. Select your country. This field is optional. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 59

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Sign the Certificate Request The next step is to sign the certificate request. To sign the certificate request 1 Send the certificate.req file you generated to your certificate authority for signing. If the request is successful, the certificate authority will send back an identity certificate that is digitally signed with the certificate authority's private key. Tip The certificate authority should return a base-64 encoded identity certificate. 2 Open the identity certificate and verify that the Issued to field includes the DNS suffix you provided upon creating the certificate request. 3 Build a certification chain from your identity certificate to your trusted root certificate. In order to do this, you will need to obtain all of the intermediate certificates, as well as your root certificate authority's self-signed certificate. If you are using a well-known certificate authority, the intermediate certificates and the root certificate authority's self-signed certificate can be downloaded from your certificate authority website. If you are using your own internal certificate authority, contact the necessary entity to provide you with the required intermediate and self-signed certificate. 60 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In the above example, the certificate was issued by "Go Daddy Secure Certification Authority" to "*.ctera.com". In order to build the certification chain, it is necessary to obtain a certificate issued to "Go Daddy Secure Certification Authority". CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 61

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings This certificate was issued by "Go Daddy Class 2 Certification Authority" to " Go Daddy Secure Certification Authority". In order to continue the certification chain, it is necessary to obtain a certificate issued to "Go Daddy Class 2 Certification Authority". Since this last certificate is a self-signed certificate, (that is, it was issued to and by the same entity), the certification chain is complete. Validate and Prepare Certificates for Upload The next step is to validate and prepare certificates for upload. To validate and prepare certificates for upload 1 Verify that none of the certificates in the certificate chain are corrupted or using invalid encoding. To do so, open each certificate in a program such as Notepad or Word, and verify that it contains the following: -------- BEGIN CERTIFICATE ------- <CERTIFICATE CONTENT> -------- END CERTIFICATE ------- 2 Change the identity certificate issued to "*.ctera.com" to certificate.crt. 3 Change the file extension of the other certificates in the certificate chain to "crt". 62 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 For example, certificate-name.crt. 4 Archive all of the certificates (the identity certificate, the intermediary certificates, and the root self-signed certificate) in a ZIP file called certificate.zip. For example: Install the Signed Certificate on CTERA Portal Once you have obtained an SSL certificate you must install it on CTERA Portal. The certificate must match the pending certificate request and keypair. To install an SSL certificate 1 In the navigation pane of the Global Administration View, click Settings > SSL Certificate. The Settings > SSL Certificate page appears. 2 Click Install Signed Certificate. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 63

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings The Upload Certificate Wizard opens. 3 Click Upload and browse to the the certificate.zip file you created. All the certificates in the certificate chain must be present in the ZIP file in X.509 format, and each file must have a ".crt" extension. The certificate is installed on CTERA Portal. 4 Click Finish. 5 Restart all the CTERA Portal servers. See Restarting Servers (on page 305). 6 Verify that the certificate updated successfully, by browsing to your CTERA Portal. 64 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 You should receive no security exception messages. Canceling a Pending Certificate Request In order to make changes to the current certificate request, you must cancel it as described below, and then generate a new request as described in Generate a Certificate Signing Request (on page 54). To cancel a pending certificate request 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > SSL Certificate. The Settings > SSL Certificate page appears. 2 Click Cancel Pending Request. A confirmation message appears. 3 Click Yes. The pending certificate request is canceled. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 65

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Exporting the Installed SSL Certificate If desired, you can export the currently installed SSL certificate chain together with the corresponding private key. To export the installed SSL certificate 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > SSL Certificate. The Settings > SSL Certificate page appears. 2 Click Export. A ZIP file, including the certificate and private key, is exported. Warning This file is security sensitive, and sending it over an insecure link may enable the server to be compromised. Importing an SSL Certificate You can import an SSL certificate from another portal, including the private key. To import an SSL certificate 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > SSL Certificate. The Settings > SSL Certificate page appears. 2 Click Import. The Import Certificate Wizard opens displaying the Import Certificate dialog box. 3 Click Upload and browse to the ZIP file containing the certificate components. 66 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 4 Click Next. The Completing the Upload Certificate Wizard screen appears. 5 Click Finish. Customizing Global Email Notification Templates You can configure email notification templates for the following: Email notification templates for the global administration portal These notifications are sent to global administrators. Default email notification templates for all virtual portals These notifications are sent to portal administrators and end users. For information on overriding these settings on a per-portal basis, see Customizing Email Notification Templates (on page 412). The email notifications are in HTML format. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To customize global email notification templates 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Email Templates. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 67

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings The Settings > Email Templates page appears with a list of email templates. For a description of each template, see Global Email Notification Templates (page 70). 2 Select the desired email template's row and then click Edit. The Notification Template Editor opens displaying the Message tab. If the notification includes a PDF attachment, the Notification Template Editor will include a PDF tab, as well. 3 Select the Customize Notification Template check box. 68 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 4 In the Subject field, type the text that should appear in the notification email's Subject line. 5 In the Message box, modify the template as desired. 6 To preview your changes, click Preview. 7 To edit a PDF attachment, do the following: a Click the PDF File tab. The PDF File tab appears. b In the PDF box, modify the template as desired. c To preview your changes, click Preview. The PDF is downloaded to your computer. 8 To undo your unsaved changes, click Revert. 9 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 69

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings Table 8: CTERA Portal Global Email Notification Templates In this fields... Do this... Portal has reached the license limit A notification sent to global administrators, when one of the limits specified in the installed CTERA Portal license (that is, the license installed on the global portal) is reached. Vouchers issued User is over agents limitation Storage node full Storage node nearly full Portal license is about to expire User is over quota limitation Invoice Notification Portal is over quota limitation Addon is about to expire Change Email Notification User is near quota limitation Password Recovery Notification A notification sent to end users when a voucher has been issued to them. A notification sent to end users when they have exceeded the licensed number of CTERA Agents. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. A notification sent to portal administrators when a storage node is full. A notification sent to portal administrators when a storage node is over 90% full. A notification to portal administrators when one of the portal's license keys will expire in 7 days. A notification sent to end users when their cloud storage space is full. A notification sent to end users with an invoice PDF attached. This template allows customizing both the email message and the PDF. A notification sent to portal administrators when their cloud storage space is full. A notification to end users when an add-on to which they are subscribed will expire in a certain number of days. The number of days is configured locally. See Configuring Email Notifications (on page 408). A notification sent to end users when a request is made to change their email address. A notification sent to end users when the amount of cloud backup storage space used reaches or exceeds a certain percentage. The percentage is configured locally. See Configuring Email Notifications (on page 408). A notification sent to end users when a request is made to reset their password. 70 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In this fields... Do this... Portal is near quota limitation Device Not Connected User Report Trial is about to expire Registration Confirmation header footer New User Notification Storage node has failed Portal add-on is about to expire Portal Administrator Report System Administrator Report Portal license exceeded A notification sent to portal administrators when the amount of cloud backup storage space used reaches or exceeds 90%. Select this option to send a notification to end users when their device has not connected to the CTERA Portal for a certain number of days. The number of days is configured locally. See Configuring Email Notifications (on page 408). A monthly report sent to end users, which includes the following information: Account information Storage statistics Usage report Details of all the user's devices Information on the status of the user's cloud backups A notification sent to end users when their trial subscription will expire in a certain number of days. The number of days is configured locally. See Configuring Email Notifications (on page 408). A notification to end users after registering with the CTERA Portal, and before activating their account. The HTML header that appears at the top of all notifications. The HTML footer that appears at the bottom of all notifications. A notification sent to end users when an account has been created for them by an administrator, inviting them to use the portal. The email message contains the portal address, as well as the username and password. A notification sent to portal administrators when a storage node has failed. A notification sent to portal administrators when a portal add-on to which they are subscribed will expire in 7 days. A monthly report sent to portal administrators. A monthly report sent to system administrators. A notification sent to portal administrators when the portal license has been exceeded. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 71

3 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings In this fields... Do this... Storage pool is full Credit card billing failed Storage pool is Degraded Project access granted Storage pool Failed Storage pool is almost full Storage pool snapshots are overdue Device activated One of the certificates is about to expire Catalog database is down Test email Portal is exceeding its license New Portal Invitation A notification sent to system administrators when a storage pool is full. This field is relevant only if the CTERA Portal is installed on the OpenSolaris platform. A notification sent to end users when billing their credit card has failed. A notification sent to system administrators when a storage pool is degraded. This notification is supported only if the CTERA Portal is installed on the OpenSolaris platform. A notification sent to portal administrators when they have been granted access to a project. This field is relevant only for team portals. A notification sent to system administrators when a storage pool has failed. This notification is supported only if the CTERA Portal is installed on the OpenSolaris platform. A notification sent to system administrators when a storage pool is over 90% full. This notification is supported only if the CTERA Portal is installed on the OpenSolaris platform. A notification sent to system administrators when storage pool snapshots have not been taken for more than 4 hours. This notification is supported only if the CTERA Portal is installed on the OpenSolaris platform. A notification sent to end users when their device has been activated. A notification sent to system administrators when a CTERA Portal SSL certificate will expire in 30 days. A notification sent to system administrators when the catalog database on the CTERA Portal server is not been responding. A test notification sent to system administrators. A notification sent to portal administrators when the portal is exceeding any of its license quotas. A guest invitation to access shared files or folders. 72 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 3 In this fields... Do this... SMS Verification Code Email Verification Code Portal plan is about to expire Device Wipe completed Backup Completed with Errors or Warnings Backup Completed Successfully No Cloud Backup for Extended Time Period Alert Notification No Cloud Sync For Extended Time Period A notification of a pass code sent to guest invitation recipients by SMS. The recipient must enter the passcode before accessing the file or folder that they are invited to share. A notification of a pass code sent to guest invitation recipients by email. The recipient must enter the passcode before accessing the file or folder that they are invited to share. A notification to the portal administrator when the portal's plan is soon to expire. A notification to the portal administrator who initiated a device wipe when all data and settings have been deleted from the mobile device. A notification sent to end users when workstation or server cloud backup has completed with errors or warnings. A notification sent to end users when cloud backup of their workstation or server has completed successfully. A notification sent to end users when no workstation or server cloud backup has run for a specified time period. An alert sent to administrators when a log is generated, if an applicable email alert is configured. To configure email alerts, see Adding and Editing Email Alerts (on page 416).s A notification sent to end users if no cloud sync has occurred between their cloud drive and their workstation or server for a specified time period. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 73

4 Configuring Virtual Portals This chapter explains how to configure portal-level CTERA Portal settings and branding. In This Chapter Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings ---------------------------------------------------------------- 75 Overriding Global Branding Settings --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76 Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings By default, each virtual portal inherits its settings from the global virtual portal settings. If desired, you can override the global settings for a specific virtual portal, including settings such as: Whether reseller portal end users can open a CTERA Portal account on their own, and the requirements for doing so Whether vouchers can be used by end users in a reseller portal Whether the folders of users who have no quota should be automatically deleted after a period of time To override the global virtual portal settings for a specific virtual portal 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Virtual Portal Settings. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 75

4 Configuring Virtual Portals The Settings > Virtual Portal Settings page appears. 2 Do one of the following: To override global settings, click Override. To revert to global settings, click Use global settings. 3 Complete the fields using the information in Virtual Portal Settings Fields (page 29). 4 Click Save. Overriding Global Branding Settings By default, each virtual portal inherits its branding settings from the global settings. If desired, you can override the global branding settings for a specific virtual portal, and brand your CTERA Portal by applying the following: A skin with your company logo and color scheme A custom Login page Creating Skins To create a skin 1 Request a basic skin from CTERA support. 2 Extract the ZIP file that you received. 3 Edit the HTML and CSS files as desired. 4 Replace the graphic files as desired. 76 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Virtual Portals 4 5 Put the changed files back in the ZIP file. 6 Change the ZIP file's extension to.skin. Uploading Skins To upload a skin 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Click Upload. The Skin Upload Wizard appears displaying the Select a file to upload dialog box. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 77

4 Configuring Virtual Portals 3 Click Upload and browse to the desired *.skin file. The skin is uploaded. At the end of the process, the Completing the Skin Upload Wizard screen appears. 4 Click Finish. Viewing Skins To view all skins in the portal 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears displaying all skins. The currently applied skin is marked with the icon. The table includes the following columns. 2 To preview a specific skin, do the following: a Select the desired skin's row. b Click Preview. A preview opens in a new window. 78 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Configuring Virtual Portals 4 Table 9: Skins Fields This field... Displays... Name Custom CSS Custom Login Page Size The skin's name. Indicates whether the skin includes a custom CSS (Yes/No). Indicates whether the skin includes a custom Login page (Yes/No). The *.skin file's size. Applying Skins To apply a skin to the CTERA Portal 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Select the desired skin's row. 3 Click Mark as Current. The selected skin is applied to the CTERA Portal and marked with the icon. Removing the Currently Applied Skin When you remove the currently applied skin, the default CTERA Portal skin is used. Tip The removed skin is not deleted from the system. To remove the currently applied skin 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Click Remove Current. The default CTERA Portal skin is applied. Deleting Skins To delete a skin 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Skins. The Settings > Skins page appears. 2 Select the desired skin's row. 3 Click Delete. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 79

4 Configuring Virtual Portals A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The skin is deleted. 80 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

5 Managing User Accounts End users are registered with the CTERA Portal and have access to the End User Portal. Each user is represented in the CTERA Portal by a user account. This chapter explains how to manage the user accounts. In This Chapter Accessing the User Account Manager ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82 Adding and Editing User Accounts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83 Viewing User Accounts -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87 Configuring Group Membership for User Accounts -------------------------------------------------------- 89 Provisioning User Accounts in Reseller Portals -------------------------------------------------------------- 91 Provisioning User Accounts in Team Portals ----------------------------------------------------------------- 96 Managing Devices for User Accounts -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 99 Managing Folder Groups for User Accounts --------------------------------------------------------------- 100 Configuring User Accounts' Advanced Settings ----------------------------------------------------------- 100 Managing Cloud Drive Folders Owned by User Accounts ---------------------------------------------- 103 Configuring User Alerts------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 104 Viewing User Account Details --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 105 Generating Monthly Reports ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 107 Enabling/Disabling User Accounts ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 108 Exporting User Accounts to Excel ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 108 Applying Provisioning Changes -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109 Deleting User Accounts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 110 Using Directory Services ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 110 Managing User Groups ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 128 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 81

5 Managing User Accounts Accessing the User Account Manager Most tasks related to managing a user account are performed in the User Account Manager. To access the User Account Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Users. The Users > Users page appears, displaying all user accounts. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired user account's row and click Edit. Click on the desired user account's user name. 82 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The User Account Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. Adding and Editing User Accounts Tip If self-registration is enabled in a reseller portal, a user account is automatically added, when a user registers; however, it is possible to add user accounts manually, as well. To add or edit a user account 1 Do one of the following: To add a new user account, in the Users > Users page, click New. To edit an existing user account, access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). The User Account Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 83

5 Managing User Accounts 3 Click Save. 84 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Table 10: User Manager Profile Fields In this field... Do this... Username Email First Name Last Name Company Role Type a user name for the user's CTERA Portal account. Type the user's email address. Type the user's first name. Type the user's last name. Type the name of the user's company. This field is optional. Select the user's role. This can be either of the following: Read/Write Administrator. The user can access the End User Portal, and can access the Administration tab of the End User Portal with read-write permissions. For information about this tab, see CTERA Portal Interfaces and Users (on page 6). This role is relevant for team portals only. Read Only Administrator. The user can access the End User Portal, and can access the Administration tab of the End User Portal with read-only permissions. For information about this tab, see CTERA Portal Interfaces and Users (on page 6). This role is relevant for team portals only. End User. The user can access the End User Portal. Disabled. The user account is disabled. The user cannot access the End User Portal. The default value is End User. Note: In order to access the End User Portal, the user must have a role other than Disabled, and their status must be active. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 85

5 Managing User Accounts In this field... Do this... Status Password / Retype Password Force password change Numeric UID Billing ID Comment Select the account status. This can be either of the following: active. The account is active, and the user can access the CTERA Portal. inactive. The account is inactive, and the user cannot access the CTERA Portal. The default value for new users created by an administrator is active. If email validation is enabled, (see Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75)), the default value for self-registered users is inactive, until the user activates the account by clicking the link provided in the email. If email validation is disabled, the default value for self-registered users is active. Note: In order to access the CTERA Portal, the user must have a role other than Disabled, and their status must be active. Type a password for the user's CTERA Portal account. By default, the password must be at least 7 characters long. For information on configuring the minimum required number of characters in a password, see Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75). Select this option to specify an expiration date for the user account password, and then click to select the date. When the password has expired, the user will be required to configure a new password upon their next login. Type a numeric user ID to assign the user's CTERA Portal account. This field is optional. Type the user's billing ID. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. Type a description of the user account. 86 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Viewing User Accounts To view all user accounts in the portal 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Users. The Users > Users page appears, displaying all user accounts. The table includes the following columns. 2 (Optional) To view only a specific type of users, in the Show drop-down list, do one of the following: To view only the users of a specific domain, select the domain name. To view users defined in the local user database, select Local Users. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 87

5 Managing User Accounts Table 11: Users Fields This field... Displays... Username Full Name Role Email Company Subscription Plan Subscription Status Add Ons Storage Usage Appliance Licenses Server Agent Licenses Workstation Backup Licenses Cloud Drive The user account's user name. To edit the user, click the user name. For further details, see Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). The user's full name. The user's role. The user's email address. The name of the user's company. The user account's assigned subscription plan. To modify the subscription plan, click the plan's name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Subscription Plans (on page 253). The user account's subscription status. This can be any of the following: Expired on date. The subscription plan expired on the specified date. Expires in days. The subscription plan will expire in the specified number of days. This status is only relevant when the plan will expire within 30 days. Expiration date date. The subscription plan will expire on the specified date. This status is relevant when the plan will expire in more than 30 days. Not Subscribed. The user is not subscribed to a plan. The number of add-ons for the user account. To modify the list of add-ons, click on the number. For further details, see Adding and Editing Add-ons (on page 268). A bar graph indicating the amount of storage the user has consumed out of the total amount provisioned. The number of cloud gateways associated with the user account out of the total amount provisioned. The number of CTERA Server Agents installed out of the total amount provisioned. The number of CTERA Workstation Agents installed and using the Cloud Backup service out of the total amount provisioned. Whether or not the user has the Cloud Drive service. 88 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 This field... Displays... Status The user's account status. This can be either of the following: active. The account is active, and the user can access the CTERA Portal. inactive. The account is inactive, and the user cannot access the CTERA Portal. Configuring Group Membership for User Accounts You can add user accounts to user groups. For information on user groups, see Managing User Groups (on page 128). To configuring group membership for a user account 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Groups tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 89

5 Managing User Accounts The Groups Membership tab appears. 3 To add the user account to a user group, do the following: a In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the desired user group, then click. 90 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 A table of user groups matching the search string appears. b Select the desired user group in the table. The user group appears in the Quick Search field. c Click Add. The user group is added to the list of user groups to which the user account belongs. You can edit any listed user group, by clicking on its name. See Adding and Editing User Groups (on page 130). 4 To remove the user account from a user group, in the user group's row, click. The user group is removed from the list. 5 Click Save. Provisioning User Accounts in Reseller Portals In reseller portals, you can provision user accounts via subscription plans and add-ons. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 91

5 Managing User Accounts Assigning User Accounts to Subscription Plans To assign a user account to a subscription plan 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Provisioning tab. The Provisioning tab appears. 3 In the Subscription Plan field, click. 92 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Select Your Subscription Plan dialog box opens. 4 In the Subscription Plan drop-down list, select the subscription plan to assign the user account. 5 In the Subscription Expiration field, click to specify the date on which the user account's subscription to the selected plan should expire. 6 Click Save. The user account is assigned to the subscription plan. Adding Add-ons to User Accounts To add an add-on to a user account 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Provisioning tab. The Provisioning tab appears. 3 To use a voucher for an add-on, do the following: a Click I have a voucher. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 93

5 Managing User Accounts The Voucher Activation Wizard opens. b Type the voucher code in the fields provided. c Click Next. The Services Activated screen appears with the voucher details. d Click Next. 94 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Wizard Completed screen appears. e Click Finish. The Manage Add-ons dialog box reappears with the add-on listed. 4 To add an add-on for the user account, do the following: a In the drop-down list, select the desired add-on. b Click Add. The add-on appears in the list box. c In the add-on's row in the list box, click in the Valid For column, and then click. A calendar appears. d Select the date on which the add-on subscription should end. The Expiration column is updated accordingly. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 95

5 Managing User Accounts 5 To remove an add-on from the user account, in the add-on's row in the list box, click. The add-on is removed. 6 Click Save. The add-on is added to the user account. Provisioning User Accounts in Team Portals By default, team members are assigned to the default subscription plan. If desired, you can subscribe an individual user to a different subscription plan. You can also unsubscribe the user account, which deletes all files stored in the account and terminates the account. Assigning User Accounts to Subscription Plans To assign a user account to a subscription plan 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Provisioning tab. 96 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Provisioning tab appears. 3 In the Subscription Plan field, click. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 97

5 Managing User Accounts The Select Your Subscription Plan dialog box opens. 4 In the Subscription Plan drop-down list, select the subscription plan to assign the user account. 5 Click OK. Terminating User Accounts Unsubscribing a user account from a subscription plan terminates the user account and removes all the files stored in the account. To terminate a user account: 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Provisioning tab. The Provisioning tab appears. 3 Click Unsubscribe. 98 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Account Termination dialog appears. 4 If you are sure you want to proceed, enter your password in the field provided. 5 Click Save. Managing Devices for User Accounts You can manage the devices associated with a user account. To manage devices for a user account 1 Access the User Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Devices tab. The Devices tab appears with a table of devices associated with the user account. 3 Perform any of the device management tasks described in Managing Devices, as if you were working in the Main > Devices page. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 99

5 Managing User Accounts Managing Folder Groups for User Accounts You can manage the folder groups associated with a user account. To manage folder groups for a user account 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Folder Groups tab. The Folder Groups tab appears with a table of folder groups associated with the user account. 3 Perform any of the folder group management tasks described in Managing Folders and Folder Groups, as if you were working in the Main > Folder Groups page. Configuring User Accounts' Advanced Settings To configure a user account's advanced settings 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Advanced tab. 100 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Advanced tab appears. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 101

5 Managing User Accounts Table 12: User Manager Advanced Fields In this field... Do this... Backup Deduplication Level Default Folder Group Specify the default de-duplication level to use for new backup folders. Select one of the following: User. Create a single folder group for the user account, containing all of the user account's backup folders. De-duplication is performed for the user account's folder group. This is the default value for reseller portals. Portal. Use a single folder group that is shared by the entire virtual portal, containing all of the backup folders in the portal. This option is relevant for team portals only. It is the default value for team portals. Folder. Create a folder group for each of the user account's devices, containing all of the device's backup folders. De-duplication is performed separately for each of the user account's folder groups. If you select User, the Default Folder Group field appears and must be filled in. Select the default folder group to use for all of the user account's backup folders. This can be either of the following: An existing folder group Automatically Create. Automatically create a new folder group. The default value is Automatically Create. Cloud Drive 102 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Deduplication Level Default Folder Group Home Folder Specify the default de-duplication level to use for new cloud folders. Select one of the following: User. Create a single folder group for the user account, containing all of the user account's cloud folders. De-duplication is performed for the user account's folder group. This is the default value for reseller portals. Portal. Use a single folder group that is shared by the entire virtual portal, containing all of the cloud folders in the portal. This option is relevant for team portals only. It is the default value for team portals. Folder. Create a folder group for each of the user account's devices, containing all of the device's cloud folders. De-duplication is performed separately for each of the user account's folder groups. If you select User, the Default Folder Group field appears and must be filled in. Select the default folder group to use for all of the user account's cloud folders. This can be either of the following: An existing folder group Automatically Create. Automatically create a new folder group. The default value is Automatically Create. Select one of the user's personal folders to act as the user's home folder. The home folder is a personal folder that is linked to the user account and cannot be deleted. Managing Cloud Drive Folders Owned by User Accounts You can manage cloud drive folders owned by a team member. To manage projects owned by a team member 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Cloud Drive Folders tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 103

5 Managing User Accounts The Cloud Drive Folders tab appears. 3 Perform any of the project management tasks described in Managing Collaboration Projects (on page 235), as if you were working in the Folders > Projects page. Configuring User Alerts You can configure CTERA Portal to send alerts to the user upon certain events. This procedure is relevant for team portals only. To manage alerts for a user 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Alerts tab. 104 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Alerts tab appears. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Save. Table 13: User Alerts Fields In this field... Do this... Administrator Alerts Customer Alerts Customer Reports Select this option to indicate that the user should receive administrator alerts, as well as a monthly administrator report. Administrator alerts are notifications about portal-level problems. Administrator reports are reports sent via email. Select this option to indicate that the user should receive customer alerts. Customer alerts are notifications about device-level problems. Select this option to indicate that the user should receive customer reports. Viewing User Account Details To view a user account's details 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 105

5 Managing User Accounts 2 Click the Details tab. The Details tab appears. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 106 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Table 14: User Manager Details Fields This field... Displays... Storage Quota Cloud Drive Workstation Backup Licenses Server Agent Licenses Appliance Licenses Account Created Last Login Monthly Report The amount of storage the user has consumed out of the total amount available in their subscription plan. Whether the user is provisioned to have the Cloud Drive service. The number of CTERA Workstation Agents installed and using the cloud backup service out of the total number available in the user account's subscription plan. The number of CTERA Server Agents installed out of the total number available in the user account's subscription plan. The number of cloud gateways associated with the user account out of the total number available in the user account's subscription plan. The date and time when the user account was created. The date and time when the user last logged in to the CTERA Portal. A link for generating and downloading a monthly report of events in the user account in PDF format. Generating Monthly Reports You can trigger the immediate generation and sending of the monthly report for a specific user account. To generate a monthly report for the user account 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 Click the Details tab. The Details tab appears. 3 Click Generate. A report is generated and sent to the user by email. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 107

5 Managing User Accounts Enabling/Disabling User Accounts If a user signed up for a CTERA Portal account via self-registration, and Require Email Confirmation is enabled (see Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75).), the user will receive an email from the CTERA Portal containing an activation link. The new user account will remain disabled until the user confirms the registration by clicking the link. If for some reason the user does not click the link, you can enable the user account as described in the following procedure. In addition, you can temporarily disable a user account, and then re-enable it as desired. To enable a user account 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 In the Status field, select active. 3 Click Save. To disable a user account 1 Access the User Account Manager. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). 2 In the Status field, select inactive. 3 Click Save. Exporting User Accounts to Excel You can export a list of user accounts and their details to a Microsoft Excel (*.xls) file on your computer. To export user accounts to Excel 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Users. The Users > Users page appears, displaying all user accounts. 2 Click Export to Excel. The user accounts are exported. 108 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Applying Provisioning Changes CTERA Portal applies changed plan and add-on settings to all users every day at midnight. If desired, you can use the following procedure to apply all changes immediately. Tip If CTERA Portal is integrated with a directory service, applying provisioning changes will also cause CTERA Portal to synchronize all the users with the directory. To apply provisioning changes to all users 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Users. The Users > Users page appears, displaying all user accounts. 2 Click Apply Provisioning Changes. The following things happen: Provisioning changes are applied to all users, and the Apply Provisioning Changes window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 109

5 Managing User Accounts When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 3 Click Close. Deleting User Accounts Deleting a user account from the CTERA Portal cancels the user's subscriptions to plans and add-ons, and deletes all of the user's folders and folder groups. To delete a user account 1 Do one of the following: In the Users > Users page, select the desired user account's row, then click Delete. Access the User Account Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the User Account Manager (on page 82). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The user account is deleted. Using Directory Services The CTERA Portal can be integrated with the following directory services: Microsoft Active Directory LDAP directory services: OpenDS Oracle Unified Directory Oracle Directory Server Enterprise Edition 110 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Sun Java System Directory Server User accounts will be automatically fetched and refreshed from the directory, and user authentication will be performed using the directory. CTERA Portal administrators can define an access control list specifying which directory service groups and individual users are permitted to access the CTERA Portal, and which user roles they should be assigned in CTERA Portal. Tip Users must have an email address, as well as a first and last name, defined in the directory service. Users without one of those attributes in the directory service cannot log in to the CTERA Portal and will cause synchronization to fail. Tip Nested groups are not supported. How Directory Service Synchronization Works When integrated with a directory service, CTERA Portal fetches user data from the directory upon the following events: An administrator can manually fetch specific users from the directory. See Manually Fetching User Data (on page 125). If a user attempts to log in, but does not yet have a local CTERA Portal account, their user account is automatically fetched from the directory. CTERA Portal automatically re-fetches all previously fetched directory users, every day at midnight, as part of the daily "Apply provisioning changes" task. An administrator can force a re-synchronization of all previously fetched directory users, by running the Apply Provisioning Changes Wizard. See Applying Provisioning Changes (on page 109). CTERA Portal handles special cases as follows: If during the fetch it is determined that a user exists in the local user database but not in the directory, then the user is assumed to have been deleted, and CTERA Portal deletes the user from the local user database. The user s folders are not deleted. If the access control list specifies that the user is no longer allowed to access CTERA Portal, then CTERA Portal changes the user account's role to Disabled. The user account is not deleted. Tip Each virtual portal can optionally be integrated with a different Active Directory or LDAP directory. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 111

5 Managing User Accounts Integrating CTERA Portal with an Active Directory Domain, Tree, or Forest To integrate a virtual portal with an Active Directory domain, tree, or forest 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Directory Services. The Users > Directory Services page appears. 2 Click Settings. 112 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Directory Services Wizard appears, displaying the Synchronization Settings dialog box. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the table following this procedure. 4 Click Next. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 113

5 Managing User Accounts The UID/GID Mappings dialog box appears. 5 To add the other domains in the tree/forest, do the following for each one: a In the Add domain field, either type the desired domain's name, or select it from the drop-down list. b Click Add. The domain appears in the table. c Click in the UID/GID Start field, and type the starting number in the range of CTERA Portal user and group IDs (UID/GID) that should be assigned to users and user groups from this domain. d Click in the UID/GID End field, and type the ending number in the range of CTERA Portal user and group IDs (UID/GID) that should be assigned to users and user groups from this domain. 6 To re-order the domains, do any of the following: To move a domain up in the table, click on the desired domain, then click Move Up. To move a domain down in the table, click on the desired domain, then click Move Down. 114 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The order in which domains appear in the table represents the order in which the domains will appear in drop-down lists throughout the CTERA Portal interface. 7 To remove a domain, in their row, click. The domain is removed from the table. Click Next. The Access Control dialog box appears. 8 Add each Active Directory user and user group that should be allowed to access the virtual portal, by doing the following: a In the drop-down list, select one of the following: Users. Search the users defined in Active Directory. Groups. Search the user groups defined in Active Directory. b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the user or user group you want to add, then click. A table of users or user groups matching the search string appears. c Select the desired user or user group in the table. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 115

5 Managing User Accounts The user or user group appears in the Quick Search field. d Click Add. The user or user group is added to the list of users and user groups who should have access to the virtual portal. 9 To remove a user or user group, in their row, click. The user or user group is removed from the list. 10 In each user and user group's row, click in the Role column, then select the desired user role from the drop-down list. Options include Disabled, End User, Read Only Administrator, and Read/Write Administrator. For information on these roles, see User Manager Profile Fields (page 85). The Wizard Completed screen appears. 116 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 11 Click Finish. The User data is fetched from Active Directory, and the Apply Changes window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 12 Click Close. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 117

5 Managing User Accounts Synchronization with Active Directory is enabled. 118 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Table 15: Directory Services Wizard Fields In this field... Do this... Enable Directory Synchronization Directory Type Use SSL Use Kerberos Domain Username Password Organizational Unit Manually specify domain controller addresses Primary Secondary Select this option to enable integration with an Active Directory domain. Select Active Directory as the type of directory with which to integrate CTERA Portal. Select this option to connect to the Active Directory domain using SSL. Select this option to use the Kerberos protocol for authentication when communicating with the Active Directory domain. This is useful for achieving Single Sign On (SSO) with Windows computers. If unchecked, LDAP is used. Note: Only one virtual portal, per system, can use Kerberos. Type the name of Active Directory domain with which you want to synchronize users. Type the username that CTERA Portal should use for authenticating to Active Directory. Type the password that CTERA Portal should use for authenticating to Active Directory. Type the name of the organizational unit (OU) within the Active Directory domain. This field is optional. Select this option to manually specify the IP address of the Active Directory domain controller(s). If unchecked, DNS is used to automatically find the Active Directory domain controller(s). If you selected Manually specify domain controller addresses, type the address of the primary Active Directory domain controller. If you selected Manually specify domain controller addresses, type the address of the secondary Active Directory domain controller. Integrating CTERA Portal with an LDAP Directory Server To integrate a virtual portal with an LDAP directory 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Directory Services. The Users > Directory Services page appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 119

5 Managing User Accounts 2 Click Settings. The Directory Services Wizard appears, displaying the Synchronization Settings dialog box. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Next. 120 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Advanced LDAP Mappings dialog box appears. 5 To configure the portal to match a custom LDAP schema, edit the LDAP mappings by clicking the LDAP attributes to enter the attributes that map to the corresponding user properties. 6 Click Next. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 121

5 Managing User Accounts The Access Control dialog box appears. 7 Add each LDAP directory user and user group that should be allowed to access the virtual portal, by doing the following: a In the Users drop-down list, select one of the following: Users. Search the users defined in the LDAP directory. Groups. Search the user groups defined in the LDAP directory. b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the user or user group you want to add, then click. A table of users or user groups matching the search string appears. c Select the desired user or user group in the table. The user or user group appears in the Quick Search field. d Click Add. The user or user group is added to the list of users and user groups who should have access to the virtual portal. 8 To remove a user or user group, in their row, click. 122 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The user or user group is removed from the list. 9 In each user and user group's row, click in the Role column, then select the desired user role from the drop-down list. Options include Disabled, End User, Read Only Administrator, and Read/Write Administrator. For information on these roles, see User Manager Profile Fields (page 85). 10 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. Click Finish. User data is fetched from the LDAP directory. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 123

5 Managing User Accounts When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. Click Close. Synchronization with the LDAP directory is enabled. 124 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Table 16: Directory Services Wizard Fields In this field... Do this... Enable Directory Synchronization Directory Type LDAP URL Base DN Select this option to enable integration with an LDAP directory service. Select LDAP as the type of directory service with which to integrate CTERA Portal. Type the URL for connecting to the LDAP server. Type the base DN of the LDAP server. This field is optional. Login DN Password User Class Type the distinguished name of a user with full user read rights, used for binding (authenticating) to the LDAP server (also known as bind DN). Type the password to use for binding (authenticating) to the LDAP server. Type the LDAP object class for user objects in the LDAP directory. Manually Fetching User Data If desired, you can manually fetch user data from an integrated Active Directory or LDAP directory. This is useful in the following situations: If you would like to immediately update data in the local user database, instead of waiting for CTERA Portal to automatically fetch data at midnight. If you would like to create an account for a user that does not yet exist in the local user database, before their first login. To manually fetch user data 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Directory Services. The Users > Directory Services page appears. 2 Click Fetch Users. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 125

5 Managing User Accounts The Fetch Users Wizard appears, displaying the Select Users and Groups to Fetch dialog box. 3 Add each user and user group from the directory service for which you would like to fetch data, by doing the following: a In the Users drop-down list, select one of the following: Users. Search the users defined in the integrated directory service. Groups. Search the user groups defined in the integrated directory service. b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the user or user group you want to add, then click. A table of users or user groups matching the search string appears. c Select the desired user or user group in the table. The user or user group appears in the Quick Search field. d Click Add. The user or user group is added to the list of users and user groups for which data should be fetched. 4 To remove a user or user group, in their row, click. The user or user group is removed from the list. 126 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 5 Click Finish. The following things happen: User data is fetched from the directory service, and the Apply Changes window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 6 Click Close. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 127

5 Managing User Accounts Managing User Groups You can organize user accounts in user groups, and then use these groups when configuring the automatic template assignment policy or setting project permissions. Tip Directory service groups are supported. Accessing the User Group Manager Most tasks related to managing a user group are performed in the User Group Manager. To access the User Group Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Groups. The Users > Groups page appears, displaying all user groups. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired user group's row and click Edit. Click on the desired user group's name. 128 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The User Group Manager opens displaying the General tab. Viewing User Groups To view all user groups in the portal 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Group. The Users > Groups page appears, displaying all user groups. The table includes the following columns. 2 (Optional) To view only a specific type of user groups, in the View drop-down list, do one of the following: To view only users from the directory service, select the Active Directory or LDAP directory name. To view groups defined in the local user database, select Local Groups. Table 17: User Group Fields This field... Displays... Name Member Count Description The user group's name. The number of user accounts that are members of the user group. A description of the user group. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 129

5 Managing User Accounts Adding and Editing User Groups To add or edit a user group 1 Do one of the following: To add a new user group, in the Users > Groups page, click New. To edit an existing user group, access the User Group Manager. See Accessing the User Group Manager (on page 128). The User Group Manager opens displaying the General tab. 2 In the Name field, type a name for the group. 3 In the Description field, type a description of the group. 4 Click Save. Configuring User Group Members Tip User accounts can belong to multiple user groups. Tip User accounts can be added to user groups as described in the following procedure or as described in Configuring Group Membership for User Accounts (on page 89). To configure a user group's members 1 Access the User Group Manager. See Accessing the User Group Manager (on page 128). The User Group Manager opens displaying the General tab. 2 Click the Members tab. 130 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 The Members tab appears with a list of group members. 3 (Optional) To view only a specific type of users, in the Show drop-down list, do one of the following: To view only users from the directory service, select the Active Directory or LDAP directory name. To view users defined in the local user database, select Local Users. 4 To add a user account to the user group, do the following: a In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the desired user account, then click. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 131

5 Managing User Accounts A table of user accounts matching the search string appears. b Select the desired user account in the table. The user account appears in the Quick Search field. c Click Add. The user account is added to the list of group members. You can edit any listed user account, by clicking on its name. See Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). 5 To remove a user account from the user group, in the user account's row, click. The user account is removed from the list. 6 Click Save. 132 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing User Accounts 5 Deleting User Groups Tip Deleting a user group does not delete the group members. To delete a user group 1 Do one of the following: In the Users > Groups page, select the desired user group's row, then click Delete. Access the User Group Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the User Group Manager (on page 128). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The user group is deleted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 133

6 Managing Administrators You can enable company staff members to manage CTERA Portal settings and contents, by adding them as any of the following: Global administrators, who have access to both the Staff Control Panel and the Administration Control Panel for all virtual portals (including both reseller and team portals) Staff administrators, who have access to the Staff Control Panel of a single reseller portal (relevant for reseller portals only) Team administrators, who have access to the Administration tab in the End User Portal (relevant for team portals only) This chapter explains how to manage both types of administrators. Procedures related to staff administrators are relevant for reseller portals only. In This Chapter Accessing the Staff Administrator Manager --------------------------------------------------------------- 136 Adding and Editing Staff Administrators -------------------------------------------------------------------- 137 Configuring Staff Administrator Alerts ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 138 Viewing Staff Administrators ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140 Importing Staff Administrators from a File ----------------------------------------------------------------- 140 Deleting Staff Administrators ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 142 Accessing the Global Administrator Manager ------------------------------------------------------------- 142 Adding and Editing Global Administrators ----------------------------------------------------------------- 143 Configuring Global Administrator Alerts -------------------------------------------------------------------- 144 Viewing Global Administrators -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144 Deleting Global Administrators ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 145 Configuring an IP-Based Access Control List --------------------------------------------------------------- 145 Importing Global Administrators from a File -------------------------------------------------------------- 148 Customizing Administrator Roles ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 150 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 135

6 Managing Administrators Accessing the Staff Administrator Manager Most tasks related to managing a staff administrator are performed in the Staff Administrator Manager. To access the Staff Administrator Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Staff. The Users > Staff page appears, displaying all CTERA Portal staff administrators. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired administrator's row and click Edit. Click on the desired administrator's user name. 136 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 The Staff Administrator Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. Adding and Editing Staff Administrators To add or edit a staff administrator 1 Do one of the following: To add a new administrator, in the Users > Staff page, click New. To edit an existing administrator, access the Staff Administrator Manager. See Accessing the Staff Administrator Manager (on page 136). The Staff Administrator Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 137

6 Managing Administrators Table 18: Administrator Details Fields In this field... Do this... Username Email First Name Last Name Company Password / Retype Password Force password change Role Comment Type a user name for the administrator's CTERA Portal account. Type the administrator's email address. Type the administrator's first name. Type the administrator's last name. Type the name of the administrator's company. This field is optional. Type a password for the administrator's CTERA Portal account. The password must be at least 5 characters long. Select this option to specify an expiration date for the administrator account's password, then click to select the date. When the password has expired, the administrator will be required to configure a new password upon their next login. Specify the administrator's role. For information on the available roles, see Customizing Administrator Roles (on page 150). Type a description of the administrator's CTERA Portal account. Configuring Staff Administrator Alerts To configure a staff administrator's alerts 1 Access the Staff Administrator Manager. See Accessing the Staff Administrator Manager (on page 136). 2 Click the Alerts tab. 138 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 The Alerts tab appears. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Save. Table 19: Administrator Alerts Fields In this field... Do this... Administrator Alerts Customer Alerts Customer Reports Select this option to indicate that the administrator should receive administrator alerts. Administrator alerts are notifications about portal-level problems. Select this option to indicate that the administrator should receive customer alerts. Customer alerts are notifications about device-level problems. Select this option to indicate that the administrator should receive customer reports. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 139

6 Managing Administrators Viewing Staff Administrators To view all staff administrators in the portal In the navigation pane, click Users > Staff. The Users > Staff page appears, displaying all staff administrators. The table includes the following columns. Table 20: Administrators Fields This field... Displays... Username The administrator's user name. To edit the administrator, click the user name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Staff Administrators (on page 137). Full Name Email Company Role The administrator's full name. The administrator's email address. The name of the administrator's company. The administrator's role. Importing Staff Administrators from a File You can import a list of staff administrators and their details from a comma separated values (*.csv) file. The *.csv file's columns must be in the following order: 1 Username 2 First name 3 Last name 4 Email address 5 Company (Optional) 6 Password 7 Role 8 Plan (Optional) 9 Numeric UID (Optional) 10 External Account ID (Optional) 11 Comment (Optional) 140 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 Optional fields can be left blank. To import staff administrators from a *.csv file 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Staff. The Users > Staff page appears. 2 Click Import. The Import Staff wizard appears. 3 Click Upload. The file is uploaded and the Import Completed screen appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 141

6 Managing Administrators 4 Click Finish. Deleting Staff Administrators To delete a staff administrator 1 Do one of the following: In the Users > Staff page, select the desired administrator's row, then click Delete. Access the Staff Administrator Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the Staff Administrator Manager (on page 136). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The administrator is deleted. Accessing the Global Administrator Manager Most tasks related to managing a global administrator are performed in the Global Administrator Manager. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To access the Global Administrator Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Administrators. The Users > Administrators page appears, displaying all CTERA Portal global administrators. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired administrator's row and click Edit. 142 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 Click on the desired administrator's user name. The Global Administrator Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. Adding and Editing Global Administrators This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To add or edit a global administrator 1 Do one of the following: To add a new administrator, in the Users > Administrators page, click New. To edit an existing administrator, access the Global Administrator Manager. See Accessing the Global Administrator Manager (on page 142). The Global Administrator Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. 2 Complete the fields using the information in Administrator Details Fields (page 138). 3 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 143

6 Managing Administrators Configuring Global Administrator Alerts This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To configure a global administrator's alerts 1 Access the Global Administrator Manager. See Accessing the Global Administrator Manager (on page 142). 2 Click the Alerts tab. The Alerts tab appears. 3 Complete the fields using the information in Administrator Alerts Fields (page 139). 4 Click Save. Viewing Global Administrators This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view all global administrators in the system In the navigation pane, click Users > Administrators. The Users > Administrators page appears, displaying all global administrators. The table includes the columns described in Viewing Staff Administrators (on page 140). 144 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 Deleting Global Administrators This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To delete a global administrator 1 Do one of the following: In the Users > Administrators page, select the desired administrator's row, then click Delete. Access the Global Administrator Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the Global Administrator Manager (on page 142). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The administrator is deleted. Configuring an IP-Based Access Control List You can configure an IP-based access control list, specifying the IP address ranges from which administrators can access the CTERA Portal interface. To configure an IP-based access control list 1 Do one of the following: To configure an IP-based access list for the virtual portal's Staff Control Panel and/or Administration Control Panel, in the virtual portal's navigation pane, click Users > Staff. The Users > Staff page appears, displaying all staff administrators. To configure an IP-based access list for the Global Administration View, in Global Administration View's navigation pane, click Users > Administrators. The Users > Administrators page appears, displaying all CTERA Portal global administrators. 2 Click Access Control. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 145

6 Managing Administrators The IP-Based Access Control List dialog box appears. 3 Select the IP-Based Access Control check box. 146 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 The list box is enabled. 4 To add an IP address range from which access to the CTERA Portal interface is allowed, do the following: a Click New. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 147

6 Managing Administrators A new row is added to the list box. b Click in the IP Range Start field, and type the starting IP address. c Click in the IP Range End field, and type the ending IP address. 5 To remove an IP address range, in the IP address range's row, click. The IP address range is removed. 6 Click Save. Importing Global Administrators from a File You can import a list of global administrators and their details from a comma separated values (*.csv) file. The *.csv file's columns must be in the following order: 1 Username 2 First name 3 Last name 4 Email address 5 Company (Optional) 148 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 6 Password 7 Role 8 Plan (Optional) 9 Numeric UID (Optional) 10 External Account ID (Optional) 11 Comment (Optional) Optional fields can be left blank. To import administrators from a *.csv file 1 In the navigation pane, click Users > Administrators. The Users > Administrators page appears. 2 Click Import. The Import Administrators wizard appears. 3 Click Upload. The file is uploaded and the Import Completed screen appears. 4 Click Finish. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 149

6 Managing Administrators Customizing Administrator Roles By default, CTERA Portal includes three built-in administrator roles: Read/Write Administrator. The administrator has read-write permissions throughout the CTERA Portal. Read Only Administrator. The administrator has read-only permissions throughout the CTERA Portal. Support. The administrator has read/write access to devices, user accounts, folders, and folder groups, and read-only access to all other settings in the CTERA Portal. You can customize these roles, adding or removing permissions as desired. To customize an administrator role 1 Do one of the following: To customize a role for staff administrators, in the virtual portal's navigation pane, click Users > Roles. The Users > Roles page appears, displaying all staff administrator roles. To customize a role for global administrators, in Global Administration View's navigation pane, click Users > Roles. 150 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 The Users > Roles page appears, displaying all CTERA Portal global administrator roles. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired role's row and click Edit. Click on the desired role's name. The Edit Role window opens. 3 Complete the fields using the information in Administrator Role Fields (page 152). For information on the default permissions for each administrator role, see Default Permissions per Administrator Role (page 153). 4 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 151

6 Managing Administrators Table 21: Administrator Role Fields In this field... Do this... Super User Access End User Folders Modify User Email Modify User Password Modify Portal Settings Modify Roles Allow Single Sign On to Devices Allow remote wipe for devices Allow Seeding Export Allow Seeding Import Select this option to give all permissions to administrators with this role and to allow administrators with this role to use the CTERA Portal API to perform Single Sign On on behalf of users. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to access end users' folders. If this option is not selected, and an administrator with this role attempts to access an end user's folder, the administrator will be prompted to enter the folder owner s password. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to modify the email addresses associated with user accounts. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to modify the passwords associated with user accounts. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to modify virtual portal settings. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to modify administrator roles. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to remotely manage devices for which Remote Access with single sign on (SSO) is enabled, without entering the username and password for accessing the device. For information on remotely managing devices, see Remotely Managing Devices (see "Remotely Managing Devices and Their Files" on page 202). Select this option to allow administrators with this role to perform remote wipe of CTERA Mobile devices. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to perform seeding export. Select this option to allow administrators with this role to perform seeding import. 152 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Administrators 6 Table 22: Default Permissions per Administrator Role Permission Read/Write Administrator Read Only Administrator Support Super User No No No Access End User Folders Yes Yes No Modify User Email Yes No Yes Modify User Password Yes No Yes Modify Portal Settings Yes No No Modify Roles Yes No No Allow Single Sign On to Devices No No No Allow remote wipe for devices Yes No Yes Allow Seeding Export Yes No Yes Allow Seeding Import Yes No Yes CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 153

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates CTERA Portal enables you to centrally manage device settings, by assign devices to device configuration templates: When a device is assigned to a template, it inherits the following settings from that template: Backup sets and exclude sets Backup applications (relevant for CTERA Server Agents only) Backup schedule Backup throughput control Installed software and firmware versions Automatic firmware updates Tip Settings inherited from a template can be overridden from the device s Web interface. Devices can be assigned to templates in the following ways: Manually, by editing the device settings. See Editing Device Settings (on page 191). Automatic template assignment. Devices can be assigned to templates based on the automatic template assignment policy, which specifies a set of criteria for assigning a template (such as device type, installed operating system, and so on), as well as an optional default template that is assigned when none of the criteria are met. See Configuring the Automatic Template Assignment Policy (on page 182). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 155

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates In This Chapter Accessing the Configuration Template Manager --------------------------------------------------------- 156 Adding and Editing Device Configuration Templates ---------------------------------------------------- 157 Viewing Device Configuration Templates ------------------------------------------------------------------ 158 Working with Backup Sets -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 158 Selecting Applications for Backup ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 171 Scheduling Automatic Cloud Backup ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 172 Restricting Throughput ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 175 Selecting CTERA Portal Cloud Drive Folders for Synchronization ------------------------------------- 177 Marking a Firmware Image as the Current Firmware Image------------------------------------------- 180 Configuring Automatic Firmware Updates ----------------------------------------------------------------- 181 Configuring the Automatic Template Assignment Policy ----------------------------------------------- 182 Setting the Default Device Configuration Template ----------------------------------------------------- 185 Duplicating Configuration Templates ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 186 Deleting Device Configuration Templates ------------------------------------------------------------------ 187 Accessing the Configuration Template Manager To access the Configuration Template Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Configuration Templates. The Settings > Configuration Templates page appears. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired template's row and click Edit Template. Click on the desired template's name. 156 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 The Configuration Template Manager opens displaying the General tab. Adding and Editing Device Configuration Templates To add or edit a device configuration template 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Configuration Templates. The Settings > Configuration Templates page appears. 2 Do one of the following: To add a new template, in the Settings > Configuration Templates page, click New Template. To edit an existing template, access the Configuration Template Manager. See Accessing the Configuration Template Manager (on page 156). The Configuration Template Manager opens displaying the General tab. 3 In the Name field, type a name for the template. 4 In the Description field, type a description of the template. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 157

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates 5 Click Save. Viewing Device Configuration Templates To view all device configuration templates in the portal In the navigation pane, click Settings > Configuration Templates. The Settings > Configuration Templates page appears, displaying all templates. The table includes each template's name and description. Working with Backup Sets A backup set represents a group of files with certain file extensions and/or located in certain folders. For example, a set called "My Music" may include all files with the extensions *.wav and *.mp3 that are located in the folder My Documents > Music. There are two types of backup sets: Include Sets. Files that should be included in each backup Exclude Sets. Files that should be excluded from each backup You can use backup sets to fully customize backup operations. For example, if you did not select the My Documents folder for backup, but you want to back up all of the PDF files in this folder, you would define an Include Set that includes all files that are located in the My Documents folder and have the file extension *.pdf. Conversely, if you selected the My Documents folder for backup, but you do not want to back up PDF files in this folder, you would define an Exclude Set that includes all files that are located in the My Documents folder and have the file extension *.pdf. Tip For information on the order in which the CTERA Portal processes Include Sets, Exclude Sets, and selected folders, see How Can I Control Which Files Will Be Backed Up?. Enabling/Disabling Include Sets In order for an Include Set to be used during backup operations, it must be enabled. To enable an included set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Sets. 158 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 The Backup Sets tab appears. 2 Next to the desired Include Set, in the Enabled column, select the check box. The Include Set is enabled. 3 Click Save. To disable an Include Set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Sets. The Backup Sets tab appears. 2 Next to the desired Include Set, in the Enabled column, clear the check box. The Include Set is disabled. 3 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 159

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Adding and Editing Include Sets To add or edit an Include Set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Sets. The Backup Sets tab appears. 2 Do one of the following: To add a new Include Set, click New. To edit an existing Include Set, click on its name. The Backup Set Details Wizard opens, displaying the Backup Set Details dialog box. 3 In the Backup Set Name field, type the name of the backup set. 4 In the Comment field, type a description of the backup set. 5 In the If field, do one of the following: To specify that all of the conditions must be met in order for a file to be included in the backup set, select all of the conditions are true. To specify that one or more of the conditions must be met in order for a file to be included in the backup set, select at least one of the conditions is true. 160 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 6 Define the desired conditions for a file to be included in the backup set, by doing the following for each condition: a Click Add condition. A row appears in the table. b Click Select, then select the desired condition parameter from the drop-down list. c In the second column, click Select, then select the desired condition operator from the drop-down list. See Backup Set Condition Operators (page 165). d Click in the third column, and complete the condition: If the parameter is File Size, type the desired file size and unit. If the parameter is File Modified, click and choose the desired date. For all other parameters, type the desired free-text value. For example, if you select File Name as the condition parameter in the first column, select begins with as the condition operator in the second column, and type "Work-123-" in the third column, then the backup set will include all files whose names begin with "Work-123-". CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 161

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Likewise, if you select File Type as the condition parameter in the first column, select is one of with as the condition operator in the second column, and type "avi, mov, mpg" in the third column, then the backup set will include all files with the extension *.avi, *.mov, and *.mpg. 7 To delete a condition, click in its row. 8 Click Next. The Select Files or Folders dialog box appears. 9 Specify the files and folders to which this backup set applies, by doing the following for each file/folder: a Click Add a file or folder. 162 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 A row is added to the table. b Click in the row, and do one of the following: Type a variable's name in the field. Select a variable from the drop-down list. You can use any operating system environment variable defined on the Windows or Linux machine, for the user account on which the CTERA service is running. If the specified environment variable is not defined on the machine, this row in the policy is ignored. In addition, a set of CTERA-specific environment variables can be used. For a list of supported variables of all types, see Backup Set Environment Variables (page 166). Wildcards are supported. For example, you can type "$USERS/*/MyFolder" to back up the MyFolder folder under all users' home directories. For UNIX/Windows interoperability, backup sets support the use of both slashes and backslashes. Any slashes or backslashes will be automatically converted to the type supported by the machine's OS. When you specify a folder name, all of the files and subfolders in it are automatically included, and there is therefore no need to add \* at the end of the folder name. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 163

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates 10 Click Next. The Done screen appears. 11 Click Finish. 12 Click Save. 164 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Table 23: Backup Set Condition Operators Use this operator... To do this... equals begins with ends with contains is one of less than more than before after Include all files for which the parameter in the first column matches the string in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Name, File Path, and File Type parameters only. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column begins with the string in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Name, File Path, and File Type parameters only. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column ends with the string in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Name, File Path, and File Type parameters only. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column contains the string in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Name, File Path, and File Type parameters only. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column is included in the set specified in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Name, File Path, and File Type parameters only. Include all files whose size is less than the amount specified in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Size parameter only. Include all files whose size is more than the amount specified in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Size parameter only. Include all files whose last modification date is before the date specified in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Modified parameter only. Include all files whose last modification date is after the date specified in the third column. This operator is relevant for the File Modified parameter only. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 165

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Table 24: Backup Set Environment Variables Use this variable... To specify this... Common OS Variables $ALLUSERSPROFILE $WINDIR $TEMP $SYSTEMDRIVE $PROGRAMFILES User-specific Windows Environment Variables $APPDATA $USERPROFILE CTERA Appliance Template Variables $USERS $AGENTS $SYNCS $PROJECTS $PRIMARYUSER Common operating system variables. The Windows "All Users" profile directory. The Windows directory. The Windows temporary files directory. The Windows system drive. The Windows Program Files directory. Variables that are executed separately for each user in the system. The path to the application data directory. For example: C:\Documents and Settings\username\Application Data, where username is the user's username. The path to the user profile directory. For example: C:\Documents and Settings\username, where username is the user's username. Variables that are defined for CTERA cloud gateways. The home directories folder on the CTERA cloud gateway. The CTERA Agents folder on the CTERA cloud gateway. The "Clientless Backup" destination folder on the CTERA cloud gateway. The projects folder on the CTERA cloud gateway. The profile folder of the local user who connected the CTERA Agent to the CTERA Portal or cloud gateway. For example, if the local user who connected the agent to the portal is "JohnSmith", then $PRIMARYUSER will refer to C:\Users\JohnSmith. This variable is relevant for the CTERA Windows Agent only. 166 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Deleting Included Sets To delete an included set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Sets. The Backup Sets tab appears. 2 Select the desired included set's name and click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 3 Click Yes. The included set is deleted. 4 Click Save. Enabling/Disabling Excluded Sets In order for an excluded set to be used during backup operations, it must be enabled. To enable an excluded set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Exclude Sets. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 167

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates The Exclude Sets tab appears. 2 Next to the desired excluded set, in the Enabled column, select the check box. The excluded set is enabled. 3 Click Save. To disable an excluded set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Exclude Sets. The Exclude Sets tab appears. 2 Next to the desired excluded set, in the Enabled column, clear the check box. The excluded set is disabled. 3 Click Save. 168 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Adding and Editing Excluded Sets To add or edit an excluded set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Exclude Sets. The Exclude Sets tab appears. 2 Do one of the following: To add a new excluded set, click New. To edit an existing excluded set, click on its name. The Backup Set Details Wizard opens, displaying the Backup Set Details dialog box. 3 In the Backup Set Name field, type the name of the backup set. 4 In the Comment field, type a description of the backup set. 5 In the If field, do one of the following: To specify that all of the conditions must be met in order for a file to be included in the backup set, select all of the conditions are true. To specify that one or more of the conditions must be met in order for a file to be included in the backup set, select at least one of the conditions is true. 6 Define the conditions that must be met in order for a file to be included in the backup set, by doing the following for each condition: a Click Add condition. A row appears in the table. b Click Select, then select the desired condition parameter from the drop-down list. c In the second column, click Select, then select the desired condition operator from the drop-down list. See Backup Set Condition Operators (page 165). d Click in the third column, and complete the condition: If the parameter is File Size, type the desired file size and unit. If the parameter is File Modified, click and choose the desired date. For all other parameters, type the desired free-text value. For example, if you select File Name as the condition parameter in the first column, select begins with as the condition operator in the second column, and type "Work-123-" in the third column, then the backup set will include all files whose names begin with "Work-123-". CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 169

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Likewise, if you select File Type as the condition parameter in the first column, select is one of with as the condition operator in the second column, and type "avi, mov, mpg" in the third column, then the backup set will include all files with the extension *.avi, *.mov, and *.mpg. 7 To delete a condition, click in its row. 8 Click Next. The Select Files or Folders dialog box appears. 9 Specify the files and folders to which this backup set applies, by doing the following for each file/folder: a Click Add a file or folder. A row is added to the table. b Click in the row, and do one of the following: Type a variable's name in the field. Select a variable from the drop-down list. You can use any operating system environment variable defined on the Windows or Linux machine, for the user account on which the CTERA service is running. If the specified environment variable is not defined on the machine, this row in the policy is ignored. In addition, a set of CTERA-specific environment variables can be used. For a list of supported variables of all types, see Backup Set Environment Variables (page 166). Wildcards are supported. For example, you can type "$USERS/*/MyFolder" to back up the MyFolder folder under all users' home directories. For UNIX/Windows interoperability, backup sets support the use of both slashes and backslashes. Any slashes or backslashes will be automatically converted to the type supported by the machine's OS. When you specify a folder name, all of the files and subfolders in it are automatically included, and there is therefore no need to add \* at the end of the folder name. 10 Click Next. The Done screen appears. 11 Click Finish. 12 Click Save. 170 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Deleting Excluded Sets To delete an excluded set 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Exclude Sets. The Exclude Sets tab appears. 2 Select the desired excluded set's name and click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 3 Click Yes. The excluded set is deleted. 4 Click Save. Selecting Applications for Backup Tip If a selected application is not installed on the target device, it will be ignored. To select applications for backup 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Applications. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 171

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates The Applications tab appears. 2 Do one of the following: To manage these settings for all devices assigned to the template, click Manage. To enable management of these settings in the devices' local administration interface, click Don't Manage. 3 Expand the tree nodes and select the check boxes next to the applications you want to back up. 4 Click Save. Scheduling Automatic Cloud Backup To schedule automatic cloud backup 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Schedule. 172 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 The Backup Schedule tab appears. 2 Do one of the following: To manage these settings for all devices assigned to the template, click Manage. To enable management of these settings in the devices' local administration interface, click Don't Manage. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 173

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Table 25: Backup Schedule Fields In this field... Do this... Periodically Start Every Specific Time Start Time Stop Time On Days Choose this option to automatically back up files every specified number of hours. The Start Every field is enabled, and you must complete it. Type the amount of time between automatic cloud backups, in hours. The default value is 24 hours. Choose this option to automatically back up files according to a specified daily schedule. The Start Time, Stop Time, and On Days fields are enabled, and you must complete them. Select the time at which cloud backup should start. Note: If a given backup extends past the scheduled time for the next automatic backup, the next automatic backup will commence immediately upon completion of the prior backup. Select the time at which cloud backup must end. This can be any of the following: A specific hour On Completion. The backup operation will only end when cloud backup is complete. The default value is On Completion. Note: If the amount of changed data to back up is large, the backup process can take several hours or days. Therefore, if a stop time is configured, the backup process may not be completed within the time frame. For example, if you specify that data should be backed up between 12 AM - 2 AM, and the backup requires 3 hours, the backup will not be completed. Select the days on which cloud backup should be performed. This can be any of the following: One or more specific days Every Day. Cloud backup will occur every day. The default value is Every Day. 174 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Restricting Throughput If desired, you can restrict the amount of bandwidth used for backing up files online. To restrict throughput 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Throughput. The Throughput Control tab appears. 2 Do one of the following: To manage these settings for all devices assigned to the template, click Manage. To enable management of these settings in the devices' local administration interface, click Don't Manage. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 175

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Table 26: Throughput Fields In this field... Do this... Do not throttle Throttle the Internet bandwidth usage Limit outgoing bandwidth to During these hours On Days Choose this option to specify that throughput should not be restricted. Choose this option to restrict the bandwidth used for cloud backups. The rest of the fields on the page are enabled, and you must complete them. Type the maximum bandwidth to use for cloud backups in kilobytes per second. Select this option to specify that the bandwidth used for cloud backups should be restricted only at specific times of the day. Then use the drop-down lists to specify the time range during which the bandwidth should be restricted. Select to specify that the bandwidth used for cloud backups should be restricted only on specific days. This can be any of the following: One or more specific days Every Day. Bandwidth used for cloud backup will be restricted every day. The default value is Every Day. 176 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Selecting CTERA Portal Cloud Drive Folders for Synchronization You can specify which portal cloud folders should be synchronized with the device, and with which folder each cloud drive folder should be synced. To select the CTERA Portal cloud drive folders for synchronization 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Cloud Drive. The Backup Cloud Drive tab appears. 2 Do one of the following: To manage these settings for all devices assigned to the template, click Manage. To enable management of these settings in the devices' local administration interface, click Don't Manage. 3 To sync the home folder, select Sync Home Folder. 4 If you selected Sync Home Folder, set which local folder on the device the cloud drive home folder should be synced: a Click Settings. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 177

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates The Synchronized folder settings dialog box appears. b If you want to sync the folder to a subfolder of the Cloud Drive folder, select Sync to the Cloud Drive folder. The local synced copy of the folder you selected is moved to the Cloud Drive folder. c If you want to sync the folder to a folder other than the Cloud Drive folder: 1 Select Sync to alternate local folder. 2 From the dropdown box, select a folder on the local device with which to sync the folder. 3 Click OK. d To exclude sub-folders, click Add in the Excluded sub-folders section. e A row is added to the Excluded sub-folders list. f Click in the row and type the name of a sub-folder you want to exclude from syncing. g Repeat the previous steps to add more sub-folders as necessary until all the folders you want to exclude are listed. h Click OK. Your changes are applied. 5 To add more cloud drive folders to sync with the device: a Click in the Quick Search field. b Type a search string to search for the name of a cloud drive folder you want to add. c Click. 178 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 All the folders including the search string in their names appear. d Select the folder you want to add. e Click Add. The folder is added to the list. f To set which folder on the device the folder should sync with, click the Settings button in the folder's row, and set the folder as described in step 4 above. 6 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 179

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Marking a Firmware Image as the Current Firmware Image When you mark a firmware image as the current firmware image, all devices that are of the relevant device platform, assigned to this template, and set to automatically download firmware images will download this firmware image. There can only be one current firmware image per device platform. To mark a firmware image as the current firmware image 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Software Updates. The Software Updates tab appears, displaying all firmware images. 2 Do one of the following: To override global settings, click Override. To revert to global settings, click Use global settings. 3 Select the desired firmware image's row. 4 Click Mark as Current. The selected firmware image becomes the current firmware image and is marked with the icon. 5 Click Save. 180 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Configuring Automatic Firmware Updates If desired, you can configure your devices to automatically download and install firmware updates. To configure automatic firmware updates 1 In the Configuration Template Manager, click Backup Update Schedule. The Backup Update Schedule tab appears. 2 Do one of the following: To manage these settings for all devices assigned to the template, click Manage. To enable management of these settings in the devices' local administration interface, click Don't Manage. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 181

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates Table 27: Automatic Update Schedule Fields In this field... Do this... Download and install updates automatically Restart appliances automatically after installing new firmware As soon as possible During these hours On Days Select this option to specify that devices should download and install firmware updates automatically. If you do not select this option, device owners must perform firmware updates manually. Select this option to specify that devices should automatically reboot after installing new firmware updates. The remaining fields are enabled. Choose this option to specify that automatic rebooting should occur as soon as possible after a firmware update. Select this option to specify that automatic rebooting should occur only at specific times of the day. Then use the drop-down lists to specify the time range during which rebooting should occur. Select the days on which automatic rebooting should occur. This can be any of the following: One or more specific days Every Day. Automatic rebooting will occur every day. The default value is Every Day. Configuring the Automatic Template Assignment Policy To configure the automatic template assignment policy 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Configuration Templates. The Settings > Configuration Templates page appears, displaying all templates. 2 Click Auto Assign. 182 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 The Automatic Template Assignment window opens. 3 Define the desired conditions for a device to be assigned to a template, by doing the following for each condition: a Click Add condition. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 183

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates A row appears in the table. b Click Select, then select the desired condition parameter from the drop-down list. c In the second column, click Select, then select the desired condition operator from the drop-down list. See Automatic Template Assignment Policy Condition Operators (page 185). d Click in the third column, and complete the condition, by typing the desired free-text value. Multiple values must be separated by commas. For example, if you select Installed Version as the condition parameter in the first column, select equals with as the condition operator in the second column, and type "3.0" in the third column, then the condition will be met when the device's installed firmware version is 3.0. Another example: If you select Owner Groups as the condition parameter in the first column, select includes one of as the condition operator in the second column, and type "groupa, groupb" in the third column, then the condition will be met when the device owner's user account belongs to user group "groupa" or user group "groupb". e Click in the Then apply column, and select the template that should be assigned when the condition is met. 184 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 4 To delete a condition, click in its row. 5 To specify that the policy should include a default device configuration template, do the following: a Select the If no match, apply default template check box. b In the If no match, apply default template drop-down list, select the template to apply when none of the conditions are met. 6 Click Save. Table 28: Automatic Template Assignment Policy Condition Operators Use this operator... To do this... equals begins with ends with contains is one of includes one of Include all files for which the parameter in the first column matches the string in the third column. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column begins with the string in the third column. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column ends with the string in the third column. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column contains the string in the third column. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column is included in the set specified in the third column. Include all files for which the parameter in the first column includes at least one of the comma-delimited set specified in the third column. Setting the Default Device Configuration Template Tip You can also set the default device configuration template as part of an automatic template assignment policy. See Configuring the Automatic Template Assignment Policy (on page 182). To set a device configuration template as the default 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Configuration Templates. The Settings > Configuration Templates page appears, displaying all templates. 2 Select the desired template's row. 3 Click Set Default. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 185

7 Managing Device Configuration Templates The selected template is marked with the icon. To set no default device configuration template 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Configuration Templates. The Settings > Configuration Templates page appears, displaying all templates. 2 Click Remove Default. No default template is configured. Duplicating Configuration Templates You can create a duplicate of an existing configuration template, then edit it as desired. All settings, except for the template name and description, are copied from the original template. To duplicate a configuration template 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Configuration Templates. The Settings > Configuration Templates page appears, displaying all templates. 2 Select the desired template's row. 3 Click Duplicate. The Configuration Template Manager opens displaying the General tab. 4 In the Name field, type a name for the new template. 5 In the Description field, type a description of the new template. 6 Click Save. 186 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Device Configuration Templates 7 Deleting Device Configuration Templates When a device configuration template is deleted from the CTERA Portal, the automatic template assignment policy rules that specify that template are automatically deleted. The policy is then reapplied to all devices that specify automatic template assignment. Tip When deleting device configuration templates, the following restrictions apply: You may not delete a template that is manually assigned to a device. You may not delete the default template. To delete a device configuration template 1 Do one of the following: In the Settings > Configuration Templates page, select the desired template's row, then click Delete Template. Access the Configuration Template Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the Configuration Template Manager (on page 156). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The template is deleted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 187

8 Managing Devices The word device refers to both CTERA cloud gateways and CTERA Agents that are connected to the CTERA Portal. Devices are automatically added to the CTERA Portal, when their owners connect their CTERA cloud gateways or CTERA Agents to the CTERA Portal. This chapter explains how to manage the devices belonging to an individual virtual portal, as well as how to manage all of the devices in the CTERA Portal system from the Global Administration View. In This Chapter Accessing the Device Manager -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 190 Editing Device Settings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 191 Viewing Devices --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 193 Remotely Managing Devices and Their Files --------------------------------------------------------------- 202 Remotely Performing Cloud Backup Operations on Devices ------------------------------------------ 202 Exporting Devices to Excel -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 204 Remote Wiping Mobile Devices ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 205 Deleting Devices -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 206 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 189

8 Managing Devices Accessing the Device Manager Most tasks related to managing a device are performed in the Device Manager. To access the Device Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Devices. The Main > Devices page appears, displaying all devices that are managed by the CTERA Portal. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired device's row and click Edit Device. Click on the desired device's name. The Device Manager opens displaying the status tab. 190 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 Editing Device Settings You can edit the following device settings: Device name When a CTERA device is first connected to the CTERA Portal, it is assigned a name based on the owner's user name, by default. For example, if John Smith's user name is JohnS, and he adds two devices, the first device will be named JohnS, and the second will be named JohnS1. If desired, you can edit a device's name. Template You can specify whether the device should inherit its settings from a device configuration template. For information on device configuration templates, see Managing Device Configuration Templates (on page 155). Backup folder If desired, you can change the folder used for the device's backups. This is useful, for example, if an old device has failed, and you want to restore the old device's backup to a new device. To do so, delete the old device, then assign the old device's backup folder to the new device. Software version You can install a specific firmware on the device. To edit a device 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click the Settings tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 191

8 Managing Devices The Settings tab appears. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Save. 192 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 Table 29: Device Manager Settings Fields In this field... Do this... Name Template Type a new name for the device. Specify which template to use for the device, by selecting one of the following: A specific template No Template. Do not use a template for this device. Automatic. Automatically assign a template to this device, based on the configured automatic template assignment policy. See Configuring Automatic Template Assignment (see "Configuring the Automatic Template Assignment Policy" on page 182). The default value is Automatic. Backup Folder Check/uncheck the box to enable or disable backup operations for the device. In the dropdown list, select a specific folder in which all of the device's backups should be stored. Software version Specify which firmware to use for this device, by selecting one of the following: A specific firmware Use Default. Use the default firmware for this device type. Viewing Devices The CTERA Portal enables you to view information on all devices, as well as detailed information on individual devices. Viewing All Devices To view all devices in the portal In the navigation pane, click Main > Devices. The Main > Devices page appears, displaying all devices. The table includes the following columns. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 193

8 Managing Devices Table 30: Devices Fields This field... Displays... Name Backup Folder Owner Template Type Last Backup Status Portal Running Version Configured Version Location Activation The device's name. To edit the device or view its details, click the device name. For further details, see Editing Device Settings (on page 191) and Viewing Individual Devices (see "Viewing Individual Devices' Statuses" on page 195). The device's backup folder. To edit the folder, click the folder name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Folders (on page 211). The user account name of the device's owner. To edit the user account, click the user account name. For further details, see Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). Note: When viewing devices in the User Account Manager, this column does not appear. The template assigned to the device. The device type. The amount of time that has elapsed since the device's last backup operation, in hours and minutes. The device's connection status. This can be either of the following: Connected Not Connected The virtual portal in which the device is defined. The field only appears when managing devices in the Global Administration View. The firmware version currently installed on the device. The firmware version that the device is configured to download and install. Note: Once the device has downloaded and installed the configured firmware successfully, the running firmware will be the same as the configured firmware. The device's location. The device's activation status. This can be either of the following: OK. The device has been activated. Pending. The device is pending activation. 194 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 Viewing Individual Devices' Statuses To view an individual device's status Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). The device's connection status is displayed at the top of the screen (Connected / Not Connected). The following information is displayed: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 195

8 Managing Devices Table 31: Status Tab Fields This field... Displays... Owner Type Running Version Configured Version Connection Host Name MAC Address IP Address Operating System Licensing Status Server Agents Licensing Agents on this device Device License From Portal Workstation Backup Licensing Agents on this device Device License The full name of the device's owner. When editing an existing device, you can click on the owner's name to open the User Account Manager and manage the owner's user account. For information on managing user accounts, see Managing User Accounts (on page 81). The device type. The firmware version currently installed on the device. The firmware version that the device is configured to download and install. Note: Once the device has downloaded and installed the configured firmware successfully, the running firmware will be the same as the configured firmware. The connection duration in hours and minutes. The device's host name. The device's MAC address. The device's IP address. The operating system on which the device is installed. This field is only relevant if the device is a CTERA Agent. The device's licensing status (Ok or Unlicensed). This field is only relevant if the device is a CTERA Agent. This area displays information about CTERA Server Agent licensing for the device. It only appears if the device is a CTERA cloud gateway. The number of server agents installed for the device. The number of server agent licenses taken from the licenses included with the device. The number of server agent licenses taken from the quota allocated to the device owner's CTERA Portal account. This area displays information about CTERA Workstation Backup licensing for the device. It only appears if the device is a CTERA cloud gateway. The number of workstation agents installed for the device. The number of workstation agent licenses taken from the licenses included with the device. 196 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 This field... Displays... From Portal The number of workstation agent licenses taken from the quota allocated to the device owner's CTERA Portal account. Viewing Individual Devices' Backup Status Tip Backup status can only be viewed if the device is connected. To view an individual device's backup status 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click the backup tab. The backup tab appears. The following information is displayed: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 197

8 Managing Devices Table 32: Backup Tab Fields This field... Displays... Next backup will run in The last backup result The amount of time until the next scheduled automatic backup. The status of the last backup: Completed successfully Backup in Progress The last backup has failed, followed by the reason it failed If an error occurred during backup, refer to the backup logs for details. See Viewing Cloud Backup Logs (on page 395). Mouse-over this icon to view the following information about the last backup: The total size of the files that you selected for backup The total number of files that you selected for backup The amount of time the backup took The amount of time since the last backup ended. Viewing Individual Cloud Gateway's Storage Status Tip Storage status only appears if the device is a CTERA cloud gateway and connected. It does not appear if the device is an agent. To view an individual cloud gateway's storage status 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click the storage tab. 198 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 The storage tab appears. The following information is displayed: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 199

8 Managing Devices Table 33: Storage Tab Fields This field... Displays... Hard Disk Drives Arrays Volumes All disk drives installed on the device. For each drive, the following information is displayed: The disk model The disk size in GB The name of any array to which the disk belongs, if applicable The disk status. For a list of possible statuses, see Hard Drive Statuses (page 200). All arrays defined on the device. For each array, the following information is displayed: The array name The array size in GB The array status. For a list of possible statuses, see Array Statuses. All volumes defined on the device. For each volume, the following information is displayed: The volume name and the storage device on which it is located. A bar representing of the percentage of the volume currently in use, followed by the volume size in GB, followed by the percentage of the volume currently in use. The volume's status in the format: Mode [Status]. The mode can be Online or Offline. For a list of possible statuses, see Volume Statuses (page 201). Table 34: Hard Drive Statuses This status... Indicates... Synchronized OK FAIL Unrecognized Inactive Rebuilding In Use This drive is in a RAID array and is in optimal condition. The drive is not in a RAID array and is in optimal condition. The hard drive has failed. The hard drive contains unrecognized data. You must format the hard drive before it can be used. This drive is in a RAID array, but is currently not in use. This drive is in a RAID array that is currently being rebuilt. The drive is currently in use. 200 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 Table 35: Array Statuses This status... Indicates... Optimal Degraded Fail Recovering Scrubbing The array is in optimal condition. The array is accessible and there is no data loss; however, the array type is RAID1 (Mirroring), and a disk is failed or missing. Performance and reliability may be reduced. Replace the failed drive as soon as possible. The array is not accessible. A degraded array is being repaired. The CTERA Portal is currently synchronizing out-of-sync members of the array, and performance of the CTERA Portal may be reduced. Once the recovery is finished, the array will return to optimal state. Data scrubbing is in progress. Table 36: Volume Statuses This status... Indicates... Key required Contains errors Read only Corrupted Unknown Ready Recovering Mounting Formatting Converting Resizing Repairing Checking Checking Quota The volume is encrypted and requires a key. The file system needs to be repaired. The file system is incompatible with current firmware. Failed to read the file system status. No file system was found in the volume. The volume is ready for use. The file system is being recovered after a non-clean shutdown. Routine cleanup is being performed after a non-clean shutdown. The volume is being formatted. The volume is being converted (from EXT3 to NEXT3, or the opposite). The volume is being resized. The volume is being repaired. The volume is being scanned for errors. The volume's storage quotas are being recalculated. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 201

8 Managing Devices Remotely Managing Devices and Their Files You can remotely access a device and the files on it, when the following conditions are met: A device administrator has enabled remote administration for the device. A device administrator has assigned you a user name and password for accessing the device. To remotely manage a device and its files 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click Access Device. The following things happen: If Single Sign On is disabled, the Log In window appears. In the fields provided, type your user name and password for accessing this device, then click Log In. The device's management Web interface appears displaying the Configuration tab. Tip To use Single Sign On from the Portal to the device, your administrator role must include Allow SSO permissions (see Default Permissions per Administrator Role (page 153)), and Allow single sign on from CTERA Portal must be enabled in the device's Remote Access settings. In this tab, you can manage device settings. For information, refer to the device's User Guide. 1 To manage the files on the device, click the Files tab. The File Manager appears. For information using on this tab, refer to the device's User Guide. 2 To manage CTERA Agents associated with the device, click the My Computers tab. The My Computers tab appears. For information using on this tab, refer to the device's User Guide. Remotely Performing Cloud Backup Operations on Devices You can start, stop, suspend, or resume cloud backup directly from the Device Manager, without logging into the remote device. 202 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 Manually Starting Cloud Backup You can manually start cloud backup at any time. To manually start cloud backup 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click the backup tab. The backup tab appears. 3 Click Backup Now. A progress bar appears, and the files are backed up to cloud storage. A success message appears. Canceling the Current Cloud Backup You can cancel a running cloud backup. Tip Only the current backup will be cancelled. The next automatic backup will occur as scheduled. To cancel the current cloud backup 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click the backup tab. The backup tab appears. 3 Click Cancel. The current backup is canceled. Suspending the Cloud Backup Service You can suspend the CTERA Cloud Backup service, including: The currently running backup All scheduled automatic backup To suspend the CTERA Cloud Backup service 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click the backup tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 203

8 Managing Devices The backup tab appears. 3 Click Suspend. If a backup is currently running, it is paused. All future automatic backups are suspended. A message appears, indicating that backup has been suspended. Resuming the Cloud Backup Service If the CTERA Cloud Backup service is suspended, you can unsuspend it. To resume the CTERA Cloud Backup service 1 Access the Device Manager. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 Click the backup tab. The backup tab appears. 3 Click Unsuspend. If a backup was running at the time when backups were suspended, that backup is resumed. Otherwise, cloud backup will occur at the next scheduled time. Exporting Devices to Excel You can export a list of devices and their details to a Microsoft Excel (*.xls) file on your computer. To export devices to Excel 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Devices. The Main > Devices page appears, displaying all devices. 2 Click Export to Excel. The devices are exported. 204 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Devices 8 Remote Wiping Mobile Devices Remote wipe causes a device running CTERA Mobile to log out and to erase all locally synced files. In addition, the wiped device s key is invalidated. Once remote wipe has been activated through the CTERA Portal, wiping commences as soon as the device comes online. An email notification is sent to the administrator who initiated the wipe procedure, once remote wipe has completed. Remote wipe can be performed only by administrators whose roles include the Allow remote wipe for devices permission. To wipe a mobile device 1 Access the Device Manager for the mobile device you want to wipe. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). 2 The Status tab appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 205

8 Managing Devices 3 Click Remote Wipe. A confirmation message appears. 4 Select I understand that this action cannot be undone or canceled. 5 Click Erase All Data. The CTERA data is wiped from the mobile device. Deleting Devices To delete a device 1 Do one of the following: In the Main > Devices page, select the desired device's row, then click Delete Device. Access the Device Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the Device Manager (on page 190). A confirmation message appears. 2 Do one of the following: To delete the device including its backup folders, click Delete device including associated folders. To delete the device only, click Delete device only. The device is deleted and disconnected from the CTERA Portal. If you chose to delete backup folders, the folders are deleted from the CTERA Portal, as well. 206 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups CTERA Portal has three types of cloud folders: backup folders, personal folders and projects. Backup folders are part of the Cloud Backup service. When a user backs up a device, a backup folder is automatically created in the CTERA Portal, to contain the device's backups. Personal folders and projects are part of the Cloud Drive service, and are collectively called Cloud Drive folders. A home folder is a personal folder that is automatically created when a user account having the Cloud Drive service is created in the CTERA Portal, to contain the user account's private files. The folder appears to the user as "myfiles" and is the user's home folder, and it contains files that can only be viewed and edited by the user. For each team portal with Cloud Drive service, a project called "public" is automatically created when the portal is created. By default, this folder has read/write permission for all users. In addition, any number of project folders can be defined by the users of the portal. CTERA Portal organizes cloud folders in folder groups, each of which acts as a de-duplication realm. When files are written to a folder in a folder group, the files' content is compared to data already stored in other folders in the folder group. Only the data that differs from existing data in the other folders is stored in the folder group. In other words, similar data will only be stored once. This accelerates the file transfer, and saves storage space. De-duplication is configured separately for backup folders and Cloud Drive folders, and is available at the following levels: User If cooperative de-duplication is enabled at the user account level for backup/cloud folders, then a single folder group is created for each user account, containing all of the user account's backup/cloud folders. De-duplication is performed for the user account's folder group. Therefore, if a user owns multiple devices, and the devices back up similar data, the similar data will only be stored once. Folder If cooperative de-duplication is enabled at the folder level for backup/cloud folders, then a folder group is created for each of a user account's devices, containing all of the device's backup/cloud folders. De-duplication is performed separately for each of the user account's folder groups. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 207

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups Portal In a team portal, cooperative de-duplication can be enabled at the portal level as well. In this case, a single folder group is shared by all user accounts in the portal. The folder group acts as a de-duplication realm that spans the entire portal. In other words, if different users' devices back up similar data, the similar data will only be stored once. Tip All folders in a folder group must use the same encryption key and passphrase. For information on configuring global default cooperative de-duplication levels for all portals, see Configuring Virtual-Portal Settings (see "Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals" on page 27). For information on configuring default cooperative de-duplication levels for a specific virtual portal, see Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75). For information on configuring cooperative de-duplication levels for a specific user account, see Configuring User Accounts' Advanced Settings (on page 100). This chapter explains how to manage backup folders, cloud folders, and folder groups that have been added to the CTERA Portal. In This Chapter Accessing the Folder Manager -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 209 Adding and Editing Folders ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 211 Viewing Folders --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 212 Managing Folder Contents ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 215 Changing Passphrases for Accessing Backup Folder Contents ---------------------------------------- 225 Exporting Folders to Excel -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 226 Deleting Folders --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 226 Accessing the Folder Group Manager ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 227 Adding and Editing Folder Groups ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 228 Viewing Folder Groups ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 230 Managing Cloud Drive Folders for Folder Groups -------------------------------------------------------- 231 Managing Backup Folders for Folder Groups -------------------------------------------------------------- 232 Changing Passphrases for Accessing Folder Group Contents ------------------------------------------ 233 Exporting Folder Groups to Excel ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 234 Deleting Folder Groups ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 234 208 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 Accessing the Folder Manager Most tasks related to managing a folder are performed in the Folder Manager. To access the Folder Manager 1 Do one of the following: To access the Folder Manager for a cloud drive folder, in the navigation pane, click Folders > Cloud Drive Folders. The Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page appears, displaying all cloud drive folders. To access the Folder Manager for a backup folder, in the navigation pane, click Folders > Backup Folders. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 209

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups The Folders > Backup Folders page appears, displaying all backup folders. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired folder's row and click Edit. Click on the folder's name. The Folder Manager opens displaying the General tab. 210 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 Adding and Editing Folders By default, when folders are created in the CTERA Portal, they are assigned a name based on the device's name. For example, if a device is named JohnS, then this device's files will be backed up to a folder called JohnS, and its cloud files will be store in a folder called JohnS-CloudFiles followed by a number. If desired, you can add new folders manually, and you can edit their properties. To add or edit a folder 1 Do one of the following: To create a new cloud drive folder, in the Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page, click New. To create a new backup folder, in the Folders > Backup Folders page, click New. To edit an existing folder, access the Folder Manager. See Accessing the Folder Manager (on page 209). The Folder Manager opens displaying the General tab. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. Table 37: Folder Manager General Fields In this field... Do this... Folder Name Owner Type a name for the folder. When adding a new folder, select an owner for the folder. When editing an existing folder, you can click on the owner's name to open the User Account Manager and manage the owner's user account. For information on managing user accounts, see Managing User Accounts (on page 81). Device Select the device with which this folder is associated. This field is relevant only for backup folders. It is read-only. Folder Group When adding a new folder, select a folder group for the folder. When editing an existing folder, you can click on the folder group's name to open the Folder Group Manager and manage the folder group. For information on managing folder groups, see Managing Folders and Folder Groups. Backup Extended Attributes Select this option to back up special file permissions and metadata. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 211

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups Viewing Folders The CTERA Portal enables you to view information on all folders, as well as the contents of individual folders. Viewing All Backup Folders To view all backup folders in the portal In the navigation pane, click Folders > Backup Folders. The Folders > Backup Folders page appears, displaying all backup folders. The table includes the following columns. Table 38: Backup Folders Fields This field... Displays... Name The folder's name. To view the folder's contents, click the folder name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Folders (on page 211). Owner The user account name of the folder's owner. To edit the user account, click the user account name. For further details, see Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). Size Total Files State The current size of the folder in MB. The total number of files in the folder. The folder's state. This can have the following values: Online. The folder is online, and it is possible to view, modify, and back up files to it. Offline. The folder is offline, and it is not possible to view, modify, and back up files to it. Folders may be taken offline during some maintenance operations, such as when repairing a folder using the CTERA Cloud FSCK utility. Folders inherit their state from the folder group. Device The device's name. To edit the device, click the device name. For further details, see Editing Device Settings (on page 191). Is seeding Indicates whether the folder is currently in the process of loading a seeding file (Yes/No). While seeding is in progress, backups to this folder are temporarily suspended. 212 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 Viewing All Cloud Drive Folders To view all cloud drive folders in the portal In the navigation pane, click Folders > Cloud Drive Folders. The Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page appears, displaying all cloud drive folders. The table includes the following columns. Table 39: Cloud Drive Folders Fields This field... Displays... Name Owner Type Size Total Files State Description The folder's name. To view the folder's contents, click the folder name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Folders (on page 211). The user account name of the folder's owner. To edit the user account, click the user account name. For further details, see Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). The type of folder: Personal. These folders are created under the owner's namespace and can be shared by the owner with other portal users. Personal folders may be used for personal use and can be used for ad-hoc collaboration. Project. These folders are created under the /projects folder in the team portal's cloud folders hierarchy. They are ideal for storing and sharing organization or team wide projects. Only users who are team portal administrators and have project administration permissions may create projects or convert a personal folder into a project and control who can access each project. The current size of the folder in MB. The total number of files in the folder. The folder's state. This can have the following values: Online. The folder is online, and it is possible to view, modify, and back up files to it. Offline. The folder is offline, and it is not possible to view, modify, and back up files to it. Folders may be taken offline during some maintenance operations, such as when repairing a folder using the CTERA Cloud FSCK utility. Folders inherit their state from the folder group. A description of the folder. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 213

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups Viewing Folder Contents To view a folder's content Do one of the following: To view the contents of a cloud drive folder, in the Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page, select the desired folder's row, then click View Files. To view the contents of a backup folder, in the Folders > Backup Folders page, select the desired folder's row, then click View Files. To view the contents of either type of folder, access the Folder Manager, then click View Files. See Accessing the Folder Manager (on page 209). The following things happen: If the folder is passphrase-protected, the Passphrase Protected Folder window appears. Do the following: 1 In the Folder Passphrase field, type the passphrase for accessing the folder. 2 Click OK. 214 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 The File Manager window opens displaying files from the last backup operation or snapshot. You can now manage the folder's contents, as described in Managing Folder Contents (on page 215). Managing Folder Contents A folder's contents are displayed in the File Manager, as described in Viewing Folder Contents (on page 214). Once the File Manager is open, you can manage the folder's content. Navigating Between Folders To navigate between folders Do any of the following: In the tree pane, expand the nodes and click on the desired folders. In the upper bar, type the desired file or folder path. To navigate to the parent folder of the currently displayed folder, in the upper bar, click. The folder's contents appear in the right pane. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 215

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups Changing the Right Pane View The Files tab's right pane offers two views: Details This view displays the items in the right pane in a table. You can sort the tables as described in Sorting Tables (on page 22) and hide/display columns as described in Displaying and Hiding Columns. Large Icons This view displays the items in the right pane as large icons. To change the right pane view In the right pane, click View and then select the desired view. Refreshing the View To refresh the view In the upper bar, click. The view is refreshed. Viewing File or Folder Details To view a file or folder's details 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired file/folder. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). The file/folder appears in the right pane. 2 In the right pane, click on the file/folder. The file/folder's details appear at the bottom of the right pane. If in Details view, the file/folder's details are displayed in the table as well. For information on changing the view, see Changing the Right Pane View (on page 216). Downloading Files and Folders You can download individual files, multiple files, or entire folders. To download an individual file 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired file. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 In the right pane, do one of the following: If in the Large Icons view, double-click on the file. 216 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 If in the Details view, click once on the file name. For information on changing the view, see Changing the Right Pane View (on page 216). The file is downloaded to your computer. To download multiple files or entire folders 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired file. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 In the right pane, select the desired files or folder(s). See Selecting Files and Folders (on page 220). 3 Click Actions, and then click Download. The selected files/folders are downloaded to your computer in a file called download.zip. Uploading Files This procedure is relevant for cloud drive folders only. To upload files 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired folder. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 In the right pane, click Upload. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 217

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups The Upload files window appears. 3 For each file you want to upload, do one of the following: Click Add files and browse to the desired file. If using Google Chrome or Mozilla FireFox, drag and drop a file from your computer to the Upload files window. The following things happen: If the file already exists, the following window appears. 218 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 To overwrite the file in cloud storage with the file on your computer, choose Overwrite and click Ok. Otherwise, upload of this file will be canceled. The file is uploaded, and a progress bar displays the upload progress. 4 To cancel an upload, select the file whose upload you want to cancel, and then click Cancel. 5 To clear the list of completed uploads, click Clear Completed. 6 When done uploading all desired files, click Close. Creating New Folders This procedure is relevant for cloud folders only. To create a new folder 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired parent folder. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 Click Actions and then click New Folder. The Choose a name dialog box appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 219

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups 3 In the field provided, type a name for the new folder. 4 Click OK. Renaming Files and Folders This procedure is relevant for cloud folders only. To rename a file or folder 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired file/folder. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 In the right pane, click on the file/folder's row. 3 Click Actions and then click Rename. The Choose a name dialog box appears. 4 In the field provided, type a new name for the file/folder. 5 Click OK. Selecting Files and Folders To select a file or folder In the File Manager's right pane, do one of the following: To select a single file/folder, click on the file/folder's row. To select multiple files, press and hold the CTRL key, while clicking on the desired files or folders. To select all items in the current folder, click Actions and then click Select All, or press CTRL+A. To select a range of files, press and hold the Shift key, click the file at the start of the range, and then click on the file at the end of the range. Deleting Files and Folders Deleting files and folders is supported for cloud folders only. Deleting files and folders is not supported for backup folders. To delete a file or folder 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired files/folders. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 Select the desired file or folder. See Selecting Files and Folders (on page 220). 220 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 3 Click Actions and then click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The selected items are deleted. Copying/Moving Files and Folders This procedure can be used for a backup folder, only if the backup folder belongs to the same folder group as the user account's cloud folders. To copy or move files or folders 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired files/folders. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 Select the desired file or folder. See Selecting Files and Folders (on page 220). 3 Do one of the following: To copy the selected items, click Actions and then click Copy, or press CTRL+C. To move the selected items, click Actions and then click Cut, or press CTRL+X. 4 Navigate to the target folder. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 5 Click Actions and then click Paste, or press CTRL+V. The selected items are copied/moved to the target folder. Restoring Files and Folders to Devices This procedure is relevant for backup folders only. To restore files or folders to a device 1 In the File Manager, navigate to the desired files/folders. See Navigating Between Folders (on page 215). 2 Select the desired file or folder. See Selecting Files and Folders (on page 220). 3 Click Actions and then click Restore to Device. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 221

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups The Restore Files dialog box appears. 4 Specify how to handle files that already exist on the device, by doing one of the following: To specify that the files on the device should be overwritten by the files in the portal, choose If the file already exists, overwrite it. To specify that the files on the device should have the modification date appended to their name, choose If the file already exists, append the modification date to the name. 5 Click Next. 222 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 The Restore Initiated screen appears. 6 Click Finish. A progress bar appears, and the files are restored to the device. Searching for Files If full text search is enabled on the device, you can search for files containing specific text, located anywhere in the document s file name. To search for files 1 In the File Manager's upper bar, in the Find files by name field, type the text you want to search for. 2 Click. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 223

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups The search results appear. 3 To download a file appearing in the search results, click on its name. 4 To clear the search results, click. Viewing Previous Versions of Files and Folders To view previous versions of files and folders 1 In the File Manager's upper bar, click. For information on changing the tree pane view, see Changing the Tree Pane View. The Please select snapshot window opens. 2 Click on the snapshot containing the file/folder versions you want to view. 224 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 Latest Version contains the current version of files and folder in cloud backup. The snapshots are marked according to their type: NEXT3 ( ) or cloud ( ). The snapshot contents appear, and you can view and download them. You can also copy and paste them to the Latest Version. Changing Passphrases for Accessing Backup Folder Contents To change a passphrase 1 Do one of the following: In the Folders > Backup Folders page, select the desired folder's row, and then click Change Passphrase. In the File Manager, click Actions, and then click Change Passphrase. See Viewing Folder Contents (on page 214). The Change My Passphrase dialog box appears. 2 In the Your Old Passphrase field, type the folder's old passphrase. 3 In the Your New Passphrase and Confirm New Passphrase fields, type a new passphrase. The Passphrase Strength area displays the passphrase's strength. 4 Click Finish. 5 Do one of the following: If cooperative de-duplication is disabled, you will need to update the passphrase on the device associated with this folder, to enable the device to access the folder. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 225

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups If cooperative de-duplication is enabled (which is the default), you will need to update the passphrase on all devices using this folder group. Exporting Folders to Excel You can export a list of folders and their details to a Comma Separated Values (*.csv) file on your computer, which you can open in Microsoft Excel. To export folders to Excel Do one of the following: To export cloud drive folders, in the Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page, click Export to Excel. To export backup folders, in the Folders > Backup Folders page, click Export to Excel. The folders are exported. Deleting Folders To delete a folder 1 Do one of the following: To delete a cloud drive folder, in the Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page, select the desired folder's row, then click Delete Folder. To delete a backup folder, in the Folders > Backup Folders page, select the desired folder's row, then click Delete Folder. Access the Folder Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the Folder Manager (on page 209). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The folder is deleted. 226 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 Accessing the Folder Group Manager Most tasks related to managing a folder group are performed in the Folder Group Manager. To access the Folder Group Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Folder Groups. The Folders > Folder Groups page appears, displaying all folder groups. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired folder group's row and click Edit. Click on the folder group's name. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 227

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups The Folder Group Manager opens displaying the General tab. Adding and Editing Folder Groups When a device first backs up files to the CTERA Portal, and cooperative de-duplication is enabled for the device's owner, a folder group is automatically created. By default, the folder group is assigned a name based on the device's name. If desired, you can add new folder groups manually, and you can edit their properties. To add or edit a folder group 1 Do one of the following: To add a new folder group, in the Folders > Folder Groups page, click New. To edit an existing folder group, access the Folder Group Manager. See Accessing the Folder Group Manager (on page 227). The Folder Group Manager opens displaying the General tab. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. 228 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 Table 40: Folder Group Manager General Fields In this field... Do this... Name State Average Block Size Average Map File Size Use Data Compression Type a name for the folder group. Select the folder group's state. This can have the following values: Online. The folder group is online, and it is possible to view, modify, and back up files to its member folders. Offline. The folder group is offline, and it is not possible to view, modify, and back up files to its member folders. Folder groups may be taken offline during some maintenance operations, such as when repairing a folder using the CTERA Cloud FSCK utility. All member folders will inherit the folder group's state. The average block size used by the folder group. This field is editable, when manually creating a new folder group. Otherwise, it is read-only, and its value is inherited from the definition of the selected Cloud FS version in the virtual portal's settings. See Configuring Virtual-Portal Settings (see "Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals" on page 27). Changing this value for an existing folder group does not affect blocks already existing in the folder group. The average map file size used by the folder group. This field is editable, when manually creating a new folder group. Otherwise, it is read-only, and its value is inherited from the definition of the selected Cloud FS version in the virtual portal's settings. See Configuring Virtual-Portal Settings (see "Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals" on page 27). This field indicates whether data in this folder group will be stored in compressed format. This field is editable, when manually creating a new folder group. Otherwise, it is read-only, and its value is inherited from the definition of the selected Cloud FS version in the virtual portal's settings. See Configuring Virtual-Portal Settings (see "Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals" on page 27). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 229

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups Compression Method Use Encryption Owner If the Use Data Compression setting is enabled, specify the default compression method to use for file storage. Select one of the following: High Compression High Speed The default value is High Speed. This field is editable, when manually creating a new folder group. Otherwise, it is read-only, and its value is inherited from the virtual portal's settings. See Configuring Virtual-Portal Settings (see "Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals" on page 27). This field indicates whether data in this folder group will be stored in encrypted format. This field is editable, when manually creating a new folder group. Otherwise, it is read-only, and its value is inherited from the virtual portal's settings. See Configuring Virtual-Portal Settings (see "Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals" on page 27). When adding a new folder group, select an owner for the folder group. When editing an existing folder group, you can click on the owner's name to open the User Account Manager and manage the owner's user account. For information on managing user accounts, see Managing User Accounts (on page 81). Viewing Folder Groups To view all folders groups in the portal In the navigation pane, click Folders > Folder Groups. The Folders > Folder Groups page appears, displaying all folder groups. The table includes the following columns. 230 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 Table 41: Folder Groups Fields This field... Displays... ID Owner Passphrase-protected State The folder group's name. To edit the folder group's name, click the folder group name. For further details, see Editing Folder Group Properties (see "Adding and Editing Folder Groups" on page 228). The user account name of the folder group's owner. To edit the user account, click the user account name. For further details, see Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). Indicates whether the folder group is passphrase-protected or not (Yes / No). The folder group's state (Online / Offline). Managing Cloud Drive Folders for Folder Groups You can manage the cloud drive folders in a folder group. To manage cloud drive folders in a folder group 1 Access the Folder Group Manager. See Accessing the Folder Group Manager (on page 227). 2 Click the Cloud Drive Folders tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 231

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups The Cloud Drive Folders tab appears with a table of cloud drive folders in the folder group. 3 Perform any of the folder management tasks described in Managing Folder Contents (on page 215), as if you were working in the Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page. Managing Backup Folders for Folder Groups You can manage the backup folders in a folder group. To manage backup folders in a folder group 1 Access the Folder Group Manager. See Accessing the Folder Group Manager (on page 227). 2 Click the Backups tab. 232 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Folders and Folder Groups 9 The Backups tab appears with a table of backup folders in the folder group. 3 Perform any of the folder management tasks described in Managing Folder Contents (on page 215), as if you were working in the Folders > Backup Folders page. Changing Passphrases for Accessing Folder Group Contents Warning Changing the passphrase for a folder group will cause all devices using folders in the folder group to be unable to backup files, until the backup service has been re-configured with the new passphrase in the devices' administration interfaces. To change a passphrase 1 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Folder Groups. The Folders > Folder Groups page appears, displaying all folder groups. 2 Select the desired folder group's row. 3 Click Change Passphrase. The Change My Passphrase dialog box appears. 4 In the Your Old Passphrase field, type the folder group's old passphrase. 5 In the Your New Passphrase and Confirm New Passphrase fields, type a new passphrase. The Passphrase Strength area displays the passphrase's strength. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 233

9 Managing Folders and Folder Groups 6 Click Finish. 7 For each device using a folder in this folder group, do the following: a Log in to the device's administration interface. See Remotely Managing Devices (see "Remotely Managing Devices and Their Files" on page 202). b Run the Backup Setup Wizard and enter the new passphrase. Exporting Folder Groups to Excel You can export a list of folder groups and their details to a Microsoft Excel (*.xls) file on your computer. To export folder groups to Excel 1 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Folder Groups. The Folders > Folder Groups page appears, displaying all folder groups. 2 Click Export to Excel. The folder groups are exported. Deleting Folder Groups To delete a folder group 1 Do one of the following: In the Folders > Folder Groups page, select the desired folder group's row, then click Delete. Access the Folder Group Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the Folder Group Manager (on page 227). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The folder group is deleted. 234 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Collaboration Projects 10 You can easily share files and folders with fellow workers, by defining cloud drive folders as projects. When projects are enabled in a team portal, users who have project collaboration permissions can create a project and invite individual users or whole user groups to have access to the project. Specified users receive an email notification inviting them to collaborate on the project. They can then view files in the project and/or add files and folders to the project, depending on their permissions. This chapter explains how to manage projects and project collaboration permissions. It is relevant for team portals only. In This Chapter Cloud Drive Folder Collaboration Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------- 235 Enabling Projects in a Team Portal --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 236 Managing Project Collaboration Permissions -------------------------------------------------------------- 237 Creating Collaboration Projects ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 239 Editing Collaboration Projects --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 243 Viewing Collaboration Project Contents -------------------------------------------------------------------- 245 Cloud Drive Folder Collaboration Overview Team portals support two types of cloud drive folders (depending on portal settings): Personal. These folders are created under the owner's namespace and can be shared by the owner with other portal users. Personal folders may be used for personal use and can be used for ad-hoc collaboration. Project. These folders are created under the /projects folder in the team portal's cloud folders hierarchy. They are ideal for storing and sharing organization or team wide projects. Only users who are team portal administrators and have project administration permissions may create projects or convert a personal folder into a project and control who can access each project. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 235

10 Managing Collaboration Projects You can add co-workers to the sharing settings for a shared project or personal folder. Those co-workers receive an email notification inviting them to collaborate on the project or personal folder. They can then view files in the project or personal folder and/or add files and folders to the project, depending on their permissions. Organization and Naming of Shared Cloud Folders Personal folders owned by a user appear directly under the root in the user's cloud drive folder hierarchy. Personal folders that other users share with a user appear in the user's cloud drive under the folder owner's name, under the Shared with me node of the folder hierarchy. Project folders appear under the projects folder in the team portal folders hierarchy. There is no restriction on the names of personal folders, even if they are shared, since they are located under their owner's namespace. Two users may have and share with others a personal folder with the same name. Project folders must have unique names. By default, each user has an automatically created personal folder called myfiles which is synchronized to the cloud by default (the name of this folder can be changed by the team portal administrator). Following is an example of a cloud drive folder hierarchy including personal folders, project folders, and folders shared with the user by other users. Enabling Projects in a Team Portal To enable project collaboration for a team portal 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Virtual Portal Settings. The Settings > Virtual Portal Settings page appears. 2 Select Enable Projects. 3 Click Save. 236 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Collaboration Projects 10 Managing Project Collaboration Permissions You can define which users have permission to create and manage collaboration projects. You define permissions by adding users and/or user groups to a list and selecting whether to allow or deny permission to each listed user and user group. By default, the user group "All Users," which includes all users, is allowed to create and manage collaboration projects. Deny rules override Allow rules. To manage project collaboration permissions 1 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Cloud Drive Folders. The Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page appears, displaying all projects, as well as personal folders. 2 Click Settings. The Collaboration Projects Settings dialog appears. 3 To add users and/or user groups and allow or deny permission to them: a In the Local Users drop-down list, select one of the following: Local Users. Search the user accounts defined locally on the CTERA Portal. Local Groups. Search the user groups defined locally on the CTERA Portal. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 237

10 Managing Collaboration Projects b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of a user account or group you want to add, then click. c A table of user accounts matching the search string appears. d Select the desired user account or group in the table. The user account or group appears in the Quick Search field. 238 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Collaboration Projects 10 e Click Add. The selected user account or group appears in the permissions list. f In the Permission column, select Allow or Deny from the dropdown list. 4 To delete a user or user group, click in the user's or user group's row. 5 Click Save. Creating Collaboration Projects Creating a project in a team portal requires project administration permissions. To add a collaboration project via the Administration tab 1 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Cloud Drive Folders. The Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page appears, displaying all cloud drive folders. 2 Click New. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 239

10 Managing Collaboration Projects The New Cloud Drive Folder dialog box appears. 3 In the Name field, enter a name for the project. 4 (Optional) In the Description field, type a description of the project. 5 In the Folder type field, select Project. 6 Specify the project owner, by doing the following in the Owner area: a In the Local Users drop-down list, select one of the following: Local Users. Search the user accounts defined locally on the portal. Domain domain Users. Search the user accounts belonging to the domain called domain. b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the user account you want to add, then click. 240 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Collaboration Projects 10 A table of user accounts matching the search string appears. c Select the desired user account in the table. The user account appears in the Quick Search field. 7 To add a member to the project, do the following in the Who has access area: a In the Local Users drop-down list, select one of the following: Local Users. Search the user accounts defined locally on the portal. Domain domain Users. Search the user accounts belonging to the domain called domain. Local Groups. Search the user groups defined locally on the portal. Domain domain Groups. Search the user groups belonging to the domain called domain. b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the user account or user group you want to add, then click. A table of user accounts or user groups matching the search string appears. c Select the desired user account or user group in the table. The user account or user group appears in the Quick Search field. d Click Add. The user account or user group appears in the list. 8 In the project member's row, click the Permission field, and do one of the following: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 241

10 Managing Collaboration Projects To specify that the member should be able to add, edit, and delete files and folders in this project, select Read-Write. To specify that the member should only be able to view files and folders in this project, select Read-Only. 9 To specify an expiration date for a member, do the following: a In the project member's row, click the Expiration field, and then click. A calendar appears. b Select the date on which the member's access should end. The Expiration column is updated accordingly. 10 To delete a project member, click in the desired project member's row. 11 Click Save. The new project is saved. If the mail server is set up, and email addresses are defined for the users you added as project members, the CTERA Portal will send email notifications to the new project members, inviting them to collaborate on the project. To add a new collaboration project via the Cloud Drive tab: 1 Navigate to the root/projects folder. 2 Click New Folder. The Choose a name dialog box appears. 242 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Collaboration Projects 10 3 Type a name for the project. 4 Click OK. A new cloud folder is created and appears in the projects share. The folder is defined as a project, by default, and you are the project owner. To share the project, see Sharing Cloud Drive Folders. For information on configuring mail server settings, see Configuring Global Messaging Settings (on page 48). For information on editing user accounts, see Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). Editing Collaboration Projects To edit a collaboration project 1 Do one of the following: To edit a collaboration project via the Administration tab: 1 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Cloud Drive Folders. The Folders > Cloud Drive Folders page appears, displaying all collaboration projects. 2 Select the desired project's row and then click Edit. To edit a collaboration project via the Cloud Drive tab: 1 Navigate to the root/projects folder. 2 Select the project and click Manage Sharing. The folder's dialog box appears. 2 In the Name field, modify the project name if desired. 3 (Optional) In the Description field, type a description of the project. 4 In the Folder type field, select the type of folder: Personal. The folder will appear under the owner's namespace (see next step) and can be shared by the owner with other portal users. Project. The folder will appear under the /projects folder in the team portal's cloud folders hierarchy. Only users who are team portal administrators and have project administration permissions may create projects or convert a personal folder into a project. 5 Specify the project owner, by doing the following in the Owner area: a In the Local Users drop-down list, select one of the following: Local Users. Search the user accounts defined locally on the portal. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 243

10 Managing Collaboration Projects Domain domain Users. Search the user accounts belonging to the domain called domain. b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the user account you want to add, then click. A table of user accounts matching the search string appears. c Select the desired user account in the table. The user account appears in the Quick Search field. 6 To add a member to the project, do the following in the Who has access area: a In the Local Users drop-down list, select one of the following: Local Users. Search the user accounts defined locally on the portal. Domain domain Users. Search the user accounts belonging to the domain called domain. Local Groups. Search the user groups defined locally on the portal. Domain domain Groups. Search the user groups belonging to the domain called domain. b In the Quick Search field, type a string that appears anywhere within the name of the user account or user group you want to add, then click. A table of user accounts or user groups matching the search string appears. c Select the desired user account or user group in the table. The user account or user group appears in the Quick Search field. d Click Add. The user account or user group appears in the list. 7 In the project member's row, click the Permission field, and do one of the following: To specify that the member should be able to add, edit, and delete files and folders in this project, select Read-Write. To specify that the member should only be able to view files and folders in this project, select Read-Only. 8 To specify an expiration date for a member, do the following: a In the project member's row, click the Expiration field, and then click. A calendar appears. b Select the date on which the member's access should end. 244 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Collaboration Projects 10 The Expiration column is updated accordingly. 9 To delete a project member, click in the desired project member's row. 10 Click Save. The project is saved with your changes. If the mail server is set up, and email addresses are defined for the users you added as project members, the portal will send email notifications to the new project members, inviting them to collaborate on the project. For information on configuring mail server settings, see Configuring Global Messaging Settings (on page 48). For information on editing user accounts, see Adding and Editing User Accounts (on page 83). Viewing Collaboration Project Contents You can view all of the files and folders included in a collaboration project. To view collaboration project contents via the Administration tab 1 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Projects. The Folders > Projects page appears, displaying all collaboration projects. 2 Select the desired project's row and then click View Files. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 245

10 Managing Collaboration Projects The File Manager opens displaying the collaboration project contents. To view collaboration project contents via the Cloud Drive tab 1 Navigate to the root/projects folder. 2 Double-click on the collaboration project. The collaboration project's contents appear. 246 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Collaboration Projects 10 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 247

11 Managing Subscription Plans You provision licenses to virtual portals, by assigning the virtual portals to global plans and add-ons. When a reseller portal is assigned to a global plan or add-on, it is necessary to provision licenses to individual user accounts by creating subscription plans and/or add-ons and assigning the user accounts to the desired plans and packages. Through subscription plans, users in a reseller portal obtain cloud services for an open-ended period of time with automatically recurring payments. Through add-ons, users can obtain additional cloud services for a defined period of time. In contrast, when a team portal is assigned to a global plan or add-on, CTERA Portal automatically creates a default subscription plan containing the licenses specified in the global plan and/or add-ons, and assigns all user accounts in the team portal to this plan. If desired, you can create alternate subscription plans and assign those to individual user accounts. Users in a team portal obtain services through their subscription plans for an open-ended period of time without payment. For more information on subscription plans, see Understanding CTERA Provisioning. This chapter explains how to use subscription plans to provision services to users' devices and how to provision services to virtual portals via global plans. In order to manage global plans, these tasks must be performed in the Global Administration View. For information on creating non-recurring prepaid service packages, see Managing Add-ons (on page 267). In This Chapter Understanding Snapshot Retention Policies --------------------------------------------------------------- 250 Adding and Editing Subscription Plans ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 253 Viewing Subscription Plans ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 262 Setting/Removing the Default Subscription Plan --------------------------------------------------------- 264 Exporting Subscription Plans to Excel------------------------------------------------------------------------ 264 Applying Provisioning Changes -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 265 Deleting Subscription Plans ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 265 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 249

11 Managing Subscription Plans Understanding Snapshot Retention Policies The CTERA Portal retains previous file versions for each user, by using snapshots. Snapshots are read-only copies of files as they were at a particular point in time. The CTERA Portal creates snapshots automatically and retains them according to a configurable snapshot retention policy that is provisioned via subscription plans. So long as a snapshot is retained by CTERA Portal, the relevant version of the user data can be retrieved. What Does a Snapshot Retention Policy Specify? A retention policy specifies the following: The number daily snapshots to retain For example, if daily snapshots are set to 10, then the last 10 daily snapshots will be retained. If daily snapshots are set to 0, then the daily snapshot will be deleted when the next day starts. Tip A day is defined as starting at 00:00:00 and ending at 23:59:59. The number of weekly snapshots to retain A weekly snapshot is the latest snapshot taken during the week. Tip A week is defined as starting on Monday and ending on Sunday. Example 1: Let's say snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current day, which is Sunday. The weekly snapshot is the one taken on Sunday, as it is the latest snapshot taken this week. Example 2: Snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current day, except the Saturday and Sunday snapshots, which were not taken because the device was turned off. The weekly snapshot is the one taken on Friday, as it is the latest snapshot taken this week. The number of monthly snapshots to retain A monthly snapshot is the latest snapshot taken during the month. Example 1: 250 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 Let's say snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current date, which is April 30th. The monthly snapshot is the one taken on the 30th, as it is the latest snapshot taken this month. Example 2: Snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current date, except snapshots for the 25th through the 30th, which were not taken because the device was turned off. The monthly snapshot is the one taken on the 24th, as it is the latest snapshot taken this month. The number of quarterly snapshots to retain A quarterly snapshot is the latest snapshot taken during the quarter. Example 1: Let's say snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current date, which is the March 31. The quarterly snapshot is the one taken on March 31st, as it is the latest snapshot taken this quarter. Example 2: Snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current date, except snapshots for March 25 through 31 were not taken because the device was turned off. The quarterly snapshot is the one taken on March 24th, as it is the latest snapshot taken this quarter. The number of yearly snapshots to retain A yearly snapshot is the latest snapshot taken during the year. Example 1: Let's say snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current date, which is the December 31st. The yearly snapshot is the one taken on the 31st, as it is the latest snapshot taken this year. Example 2: Snapshots were successfully taken every day until the current date, except snapshots for the 25nd through the 31st were not taken because the device was turned off. The yearly snapshot is the one taken on the 24th, as it is the latest snapshot taken this year. At What Level Can a Snapshot Retention Policy Be Applied? Snapshot retention policies can be applied at the following levels: At the virtual portal level In this case, the snapshot retention policy will apply to all users in the virtual portal. A snapshot retention policy can be applied to both reseller portals and team portals. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 251

11 Managing Subscription Plans At the user level It is possible to configure snapshot retention policies for individual users in the virtual portal. Tip Applying a retention policy at the user level in a reseller portal is supported from v3.2. Applying a retention policy at the user level in a team portal is supported from v4.0. What Happens When Both Levels of Snapshot Retention Policy Are Applied? When a snapshot retention policy is assigned to a portal, the policy will be globally enforced as a set of maximum values for all users in the portal. Individual users in that portal can be assigned user-level snapshot retention policies, so long as the values in the user-level policy do not exceed those of the portal-level policy. For example, let us assume that a team portal called "acme" is assigned a subscription plan called "acme-plan", which includes the following snapshot retention policy. Retain 7 daily snapshots Retain 4 weekly snapshots Retain 12 monthly snapshots Users in the "acme" portal cannot be assigned a snapshot retention policy that exceeds the values specified in "acme-plan". Therefore, users in this portal cannot be assigned the following snapshot retention policy: Retain 10 daily snapshots Retain 15 weekly snapshots Retain 17 monthly snapshots However, they can be assigned the following snapshot retention policy: Retain 6 daily snapshots Retain 2 weekly snapshots Retain 9 monthly snapshots CTERA Portal Snapshot Retention for the Cloud Drive Service Each user account that uses the Cloud Drive service is assigned a home folder in the CTERA Portal, upon creation of the user account. The home folder (Cloud Drive) serves as the block destination for CTERA Cloud Gateway and CTERA Cloud Agent sync operations. Snapshots of Cloud Drive folders are taken for each folder once an hour, if there were any changes in the folder during that hour. 252 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 CTERA Portal Snapshot Retention for the Cloud Backup Service. Each CTERA C Series cloud gateway and CTERA Cloud Agent that uses the Cloud Backup service is assigned a dedicated backup folder in the CTERA Portal, which serves as the block destination for the cloud gateway or Cloud Agent. When a CTERA cloud gateway or CTERA Cloud Agent initiates a Cloud Backup job, the CTERA Portal automatically creates a snapshot of the cloud gateway's or Cloud Agent's backup folder. The snapshot's timestamp is the time at which the Cloud Backup job was initiated by the client. Snapshot Consolidation The snapshot consolidator is a scheduled job that runs once a day at midnight. It is responsible for deleting all the snapshots that should not be retained, according to the retention policy. Adding and Editing Subscription Plans To add or edit a subscription plan 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Plans. The Provisioning > Plans page appears, displaying all subscription plans. 2 Do one of the following: To add a new subscription plan, click New Plan. To edit an existing subscription plan, select the desired subscription plan's row and then click Edit Plan. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 253

11 Managing Subscription Plans The Plan Details Wizard opens displaying the Services dialog box. 3 Complete the fields using the information in Plan Services Fields (page 260). 4 Click Next. The Plan Details dialog box appears. 5 Complete the fields using the information in Plan Details Fields (page 261). 254 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 6 Click Next. The Snapshot Retention Policy dialog box appears. 7 Complete the fields using the information in Snapshot Retention Policy Fields (page 261). Tip 8 Click Next. For an explanation of each policy, see Understanding Snapshot Retention Policies (on page 250). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 255

11 Managing Subscription Plans The Plan Name and Description dialog box appears. 9 Complete the fields using the information in Plan Name and Description Fields (page 262). 10 Click Next. The Quotas dialog box appears. 256 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 11 For each item, click in the Amount Included field, and then type the number of item units to include in the subscription plan. For example, to include 5GB of storage space, click in the Storage Quota (GB) item's Amount Included field and type 5. 12 Click Next. Tip The specified license quotas must not exceed the number specified in the license. Otherwise, an error message will appear when you attempt to assign a virtual portal to this plan. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 257

11 Managing Subscription Plans The Wizard Completed screen appears. 13 Click Finish. If you edited an existing plan, the following things happen: Provisioning changes are applied to all users, and the Apply Provisioning Changes window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. 258 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 14 Click Close. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 259

11 Managing Subscription Plans Table 42: Plan Services Fields In this field... Do this... Cloud Backup Service Seeding Supported Remote Access Cloud Drive Cloud Drive Invitations Indicates that the Cloud Backup Service is included in the subscription plan. This field is read-only. Select this option to include backup seeding in the subscription plan. Select this option to include remote access in the subscription plan. Remote access includes both access to the device's management interface via the CTERA Portal and a dedicated URL, access to the user's files via the CTERA Portal and a dedicated URL. Note: Device owners can disable remote access via the device's management interface. Select this option to include private cloud drives in the subscription plan. In a team portal, users will be able to access the private cloud drive in addition to the team cloud drive. Users will be able to access their cloud drives via the End User Portal's Files tab, for the purpose of viewing, uploading, and downloading files. Select this option to include cloud file sharing in the subscription plan. This enables the user to send invitations to view or collaborate on files stored on the cloud drive. 260 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 Table 43: Plan Details Fields In this field... Do this... Allow users to join this plan Free Trial Select this option to allow users to subscribe to this subscription plan. If this option is not selected, the subscription plan is invisible to end users, and only administrators can assign users to this plan. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. Select this option to include a free trial period in the subscription plan. Then type the desired number of days that subscribers should receive the subscription plan for free. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. Table 44: Snapshot Retention Policy Fields In this field... Do this... Retain daily snapshots Retain weekly snapshots Retain monthly snapshots Retain quarterly snapshots Retain yearly snapshots Type the number of daily snapshots that should be retained. Type the number of weekly snapshots that should be retained. Type the number of monthly snapshots that should be retained. Type the number of quarterly snapshots that should be retained. Type the number of yearly snapshots that should be retained. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 261

11 Managing Subscription Plans Table 45: Plan Name and Description Fields In this field... Do this... Plan Name Display Name Sort Index Description Preview Type a name for the subscription plan. Type the name to use when displaying this subscription plan in the End User Portal and notifications. Type an index number to assign the subscription plan, in order to enable custom sorting of the subscription plans displayed to end users in the Subscribe to Plan wizard. This field is optional. Type a description of the subscription plan. HTML is supported. Click this button to view a preview of the subscription plan description in a new window. Viewing Subscription Plans To view all subscription plans in the portal In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Plans. The Provisioning > Plans page appears, displaying all subscription plans. If a default subscription plan is defined, it is marked with the icon. The table includes the following columns. 262 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 Table 46: Plans Fields This field... Displays... Name Display Name Sort Index Storage Allow Joining Trial Appliance Licenses Server Agent Licenses Workstation Backup Licenses Cloud Drive Licenses The subscription plan's name. To edit the subscription plan, click the subscription plan name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Subscription Plans (on page 253). The subscription plan's name, as displayed in the End User Portal and notifications. An index number assigned to the subscription plan, in order to enable custom sorting of the subscription plans displayed to end users in the Subscribe to Plan wizard. The amount of storage space included in the plan. Indicates whether users can subscribe to this plan from the End User Portal (Yes/No). Note: If set to No, an administrator can still assign users to this plan. If the plan includes a free trial period, this column displays the number of days included in the free trial period. If the plan does not include a free trial period, this column displays No. The number of CTERA appliance licenses included in the plan. A CTERA appliance license is consumed by a CTERAcloud gateway connected to a CTERA Portal user account. The number of CTERA Server Agent licenses included in the plan. A Server Agent license is consumed by a Server Agent in Cloud Agent mode using the CTERA Cloud Backup service. The number of CTERA Workstation Backup licenses included in the plan. A workstation backup license is consumed by a CTERA Workstation Agent in Cloud Agent mode using the CTERA Cloud Backup service. The number of CTERA Cloud Drive licenses included in the plan. Each Cloud Drive license enables one user to connect and sync data to the CTERA Portal for up to five devices associated with the user account, including: CTERA Agents (Server or Workstation Backup) and mobile devices (iphone, ipad, and so on). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 263

11 Managing Subscription Plans Setting/Removing the Default Subscription Plan The default subscription plan is automatically assigned to all new user accounts. To set a subscription plan as the default 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Plans. The Provisioning > Plans page appears, displaying all subscription plans. 2 Select the desired subscription plan's row. 3 Click Set Default. The selected subscription plan becomes the default subscription plan and is marked with the icon. To remove a subscription plan from being the default 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Plans. The Provisioning > Plans page appears, displaying all subscription plans. 2 Select the default subscription plan's row. 3 Click Remove Default. The subscription plan is no longer the default, and the icon is removed. Exporting Subscription Plans to Excel You can export subscription plans to a CSV file that can be opened with Microsoft Excel. To export subscription plans 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Plans. The Provisioning > Plans page appears, displaying all subscription plans. 2 Click Export to Excel. All subscription plans are exported to a CSV file. 264 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Subscription Plans 11 Applying Provisioning Changes CTERA Portal applies changed plan and add-on settings to all users every day at midnight. If desired, you can use the following procedure to apply all changes immediately. To apply provisioning changes 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Plans. The Provisioning > Plans page appears, displaying all subscription plans. 2 Click Apply Provisioning Changes. The following things happen: Provisioning changes are applied to all users, and the Apply Provisioning Changes window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 3 Click Close. Deleting Subscription Plans To delete a subscription plan 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Plans. The Provisioning > Plans page appears, displaying all subscription plans. 2 Select the desired subscription plan's row. 3 Click Delete Plan. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The subscription plan is deleted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 265

12 Managing Add-ons In reseller portals, users can subscribe to add-ons, each of which defines a set of services that subscribed users will receive in addition to the services specified in the subscription plan, for a specified period of time. In contrast, all users in a team portal obtain additional services for specified period of time, when the portal is subscribed to a global add-on. For more information on add-ons, see Understanding CTERA Provisioning. This chapter explains how to use add-ons to provision services to user's devices (in reseller portals), as well as how to provision services to virtual portals (including both reseller and team portals) via global add-ons. In order to provision global add-ons, these tasks must be performed in the Global Administration View. In This Chapter Adding and Editing Add-ons ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 268 Viewing Add-ons -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 273 Exporting Add-ons to Excel ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 273 Applying Provisioning Changes -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 274 Deleting Add-ons ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 274 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 267

12 Managing Add-ons Adding and Editing Add-ons Once you have added an end-user add-on to the portal, you can then add the add-on directly to user accounts, as described in Adding Add-ons to User Accounts (on page 93). Alternatively, for a "pre-paid" business model, you can create vouchers for the add-on, as described in Adding Vouchers (on page 275). End users can then redeem the vouchers in order to add the add-on to their user accounts. Once you have added a portal-level add-on to the system, you can then add the add-on directly to a portal, as described in Adding Global Add-ons to Virtual Portals (on page 291). To add or edit an add-on 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Add-ons. The Provisioning > Add-ons page appears, displaying all add-ons. 2 Do one of the following: To add a new add-on, click New. To edit an existing add-on, select the desired add-on's row and then click Edit. The Add-on Wizard opens displaying the Add-on Wizard dialog box. 268 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Add-ons 12 3 Complete the fields using the information in Add-on Services Fields (page 272). 4 Click Next. A second Add-on Wizard dialog box appears. 5 Complete the fields using the information in Add-on Details Fields (page 272). 6 Click Next. The Quotas dialog box appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 269

12 Managing Add-ons 7 For each item, click in the Amount Included field, and then type the number of item units to include in the subscription plan. For example, to include 5GB of storage space, click in the Storage Quota (GB) item's Amount Included field and type 5. 8 Click Next. The Wizard Complete screen appears. 9 Click Finish. If you edited an existing add-on, the following things happen: 270 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Add-ons 12 Provisioning changes are applied to all users, and the Apply Provisioning Changes window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 10 Click Close. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 271

12 Managing Add-ons Table 47: Add-on Services Fields In this field... Do this... Cloud Backup Service Seeding Supported Remote Access Cloud Drive Allow Invitations Indicates that the Cloud Backup Service is included in the add-on. This field is read-only. Select this option to include backup seeding in the add-on. Select this option to include remote access in the add-on. Remote access includes both access to the device's management interface via the CTERA Portal and a dedicated URL, access to the user's files via the CTERA Portal and a dedicated URL. Note: Device owners can disable remote access via the device's management interface. Select this option to include private cloud drives in the add-on. In a team portal, users will be able to access the private cloud drive in addition to the team cloud drive. Users will be able to access their cloud drives via the End User Portal's Files tab, for the purpose of viewing, uploading, and downloading files. Select this option to include cloud file sharing in the add-on. When email invitations are enabled for a device, end users will be able to invite others to view or collaborate on files stored on the device. Table 48: Add-on Details Fields In this field... Do this... Name Display Name Expires after Type a name for the add-on. Type the name to use when displaying this add-on in the End User Portal and notifications. Select this option to define an expiration date for the add-on, then type the number of days after the add-on has been added to the user account that the add-on should expire. 272 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Add-ons 12 Viewing Add-ons To view all add-ons in the portal In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Add-ons. The Provisioning > Add-ons page appears, displaying all add-ons. The table includes the following columns. Table 49: Add-ons Fields This field... Displays... Name Display Name Storage Expires Appliance Licenses Server Agent Licenses Workstation Backup Licenses Cloud Drive Licenses The add-on's name. To edit the add-on, click the add-on name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Add-ons (on page 268). The add-on's name, as displayed in the End User Portal and notifications. The amount of storage space included in the add-on. The number of days after adding this add-on, that the add-on will expire. The number of CTERA appliance licenses included in the add-on. The number of CTERA Server Agents included in the add-on. The number of CTERA Workstation Backup licenses included in the add-on. The number of CTERA Cloud Drive licenses included in the add-on. Exporting Add-ons to Excel You can export add-ons to a CSV file that can be opened with Microsoft Excel. To export add-ons 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Add-ons. The Provisioning > Add-ons page appears, displaying all add-ons. 2 Click Export to Excel. All add-ons are exported to a CSV file. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 273

12 Managing Add-ons Applying Provisioning Changes CTERA Portal applies changed plan and add-on settings to all users every day at midnight. If desired, you can use the following procedure to apply all changes immediately. To apply provisioning changes 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Add-ons. The Provisioning > Add-ons page appears, displaying all add-ons. 2 Click Apply Provisioning Changes. The following things happen: Provisioning changes are applied to all users, and the Apply Provisioning Changes window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 3 Click Close. Deleting Add-ons To delete an add-on 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Add-ons. The Provisioning > Add-ons page appears, displaying all add-ons. 2 Select the desired add-on's row. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The add-on is deleted. 274 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

13 Managing Vouchers The CTERA Portal enables you to create vouchers, which are prepaid coupons that encapsulate specific add-ons and plans. For more information on vouchers, see Understanding CTERA Provisioning. This chapter explains how to manage vouchers. It is relevant to reseller portals only. Tip In This Chapter In order to use vouchers, vouchers support must be enabled in the CTERA Portal general settings. See Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75). Adding Vouchers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 275 Viewing Vouchers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 277 Sending Vouchers by Email ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 278 Exporting Vouchers to Excel ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 278 Deleting Vouchers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 278 Adding Vouchers To add a voucher 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Vouchers. The Provisioning > Vouchers page appears, displaying all vouchers. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 275

13 Managing Vouchers 2 Click New. The Create Vouchers opens displaying the Create Vouchers dialog box. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Next. The Wizard Complete screen appears. 5 Click Finish. 276 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Vouchers 13 Table 50: Voucher Wizard Fields In this field... Do this... Add-on / Plan Voucher Code Number of Vouchers to Create Comment Select the add-on or subscription plan to which this voucher applies. Type the voucher code prefix to use for all vouchers of this type. This can be any sequence of five alphanumeric characters. For example: PKG1Y. Click the arrows or type in the field, to specify the number of vouchers of this type to create. For example: 10. Type a description of this voucher. For example: This voucher can be redeemed for 1 year of 10GB online backup service. Viewing Vouchers To view all vouchers in the portal In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Vouchers. The Provisioning > Vouchers page appears, displaying all vouchers. The table includes the following columns. Table 51: Vouchers Fields This field... Displays... Voucher Code Add-on / Plan Status Redeem Date Redeemed By Issue Date Comment The voucher's code. The add-on or subscription plan to which this voucher applies. The voucher's status. Active. The voucher has not yet been redeemed. Redeemed. The voucher has been redeemed by a user, and is no longer available to be redeemed by other users. The date on which the voucher was redeemed. The name of the user account that redeemed the voucher. The date on which the voucher was created. A description of the voucher. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 277

13 Managing Vouchers Sending Vouchers by Email You can send an email message to end users, notifying them that a voucher has been issued to them. To send a voucher by email 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Vouchers. The Provisioning > Vouchers page appears, displaying all vouchers. 2 Select the desired voucher's row, then click Send by Email. An email message opens in your email client. The message's content can be edited as desired. For information on customizing the message's default content, see Customizing Email Notification Templates (on page 412). 3 In the To field, type the end user's email address. 4 Click Send. Exporting Vouchers to Excel You can export vouchers to a CSV file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel. To export vouchers 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Vouchers. The Provisioning > Vouchers page appears, displaying all vouchers. 2 Click Export to Excel. All vouchers are exported to a CSV file. Deleting Vouchers To delete a voucher 1 In the navigation pane, click Provisioning > Vouchers. The Provisioning > Vouchers page appears, displaying all vouchers. 2 Select the desired voucher's row. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. 278 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Vouchers 13 The voucher is deleted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 279

14 Managing Guest Invitations When subscribed to the Cloud File Sharing service, end users can share files and folders stored on the cloud drive, by sending guest invitations to the desired files/folders. Invitation recipients are granted read-only or read-write access to the shared files/folders. Guest invitations are special time-limited URLs containing a secret code that grants the recipient the ability to view a specific file or folder on a Cloud Drive, and to optionally collaborate on those items. As an administrator, you can choose how long guest invitations are valid for and which of several protection levels are available to end users for protecting their guest invitations from unintended access. Guest invitations support two factor authentication. Guest Invitation settings are found under Invitation Settings in the Settings > Virtual Portal Settings page. For information about the settings, see Virtual Portal Settings Fields (page 29). All accesses to guest invitations, as well as successful or failed authentication attempts, are logged in the CTERA Portal Access Log. See Viewing Access Logs (on page 399). This chapter explains how to manage guest invitations. In This Chapter Viewing Active Guest Invitations ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 282 Deleting Active Guest Invitations ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 284 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 281

14 Managing Guest Invitations Viewing Active Guest Invitations To view active guest invitations 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Invitations. The Settings > Invitations page appears. For each invitation the information in the following table is displayed. 2 To view an individual invitation, select the desired invitation, and then click View Invitation. The Send Invitation dialog box opens displaying the invitation. 282 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Guest Invitations 14 Table 52: Active Guest Invitations Information This field... Displays... User Expires On Path Access Protection Level Email addresses The name of the user who sent the guest invitation. This field only appears when viewing all guest invitations in the system. The date on which the guest invitation expires. The path to the shared file/folder on the cloud drive. The type of access granted to the invitation recipient (Read Only or Read/Write). The protection level used for protecting the invitation from unauthorized access. Possible values: Public Link - A public link is a time limited link containing a secret access code to the folder or file. Public links can be freely forwarded by the recipient to any other person, and can also be posted on public websites and so on. Verify with Email - This level applies two factor authentication. The recipient receives a time limited authenticated link to the file or folder. On every access, a new 6 digit passcode challenge is sent to the recipient by email to the invitation. The recipient must enter the passcode before accessing the file or folder. This ensures that the invitation is not usable in case the invitation link is accidentally forwarded to another person, or posted on a public website. Verify with Text Message - This level applies two factor authentication. The recipient receives a time limited authenticated link to the file or folder. On every access, a new 6 digit passcode challenge is sent to the recipient by text message. The recipient must enter the passcode before accessing the file or folder. This ensures that the invitation is not usable in case the invitation link is accidentally forwarded to another person, or posted on a public website. Registered Users - This is the highest protection level. The recipient receives a time limited authenticated link to the file or folder and is required to authenticate to the portal using a valid username and password before accessing the file or folder. The email address(es) to which the invitation was sent. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 283

14 Managing Guest Invitations This field... Displays... Recipient Cellphone The invitation recipient's cellphone number to which a verification code was sent. Deleting Active Guest Invitations If you delete an active guest invitation, the path and/or URL it contains can no longer be used to access files. To delete active guest invitations 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Invitations. The Settings > Invitations page appears. 2 Select the desired invitation, and then click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 3 Click Yes. The guest invitation is deleted. 284 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

15 Managing Virtual Portals The CTERA Portal can be divided into tenants, known as virtual portals, each of which manages a subset of devices and CTERA Portal user accounts. The following types of virtual portal are supported: Reseller portal This type of portal includes support for reseller-oriented features such as add-ons, plans, vouchers, and self-registration. The end users in the portal are the reseller's subscribers. Reseller portals are managed by staff administrators in the Staff Control Panel. Team portal This type of portal is designed for the needs of a company or team with multiple members, and as such do not include support for reseller-oriented features. The users in the portal are the team members. Team portals are managed by team administrators, who are team members with the "Administrator role. These users can manage their team portal via the Administration tab of their End User Portal. For more detailed information on the two types of virtual portals, see The CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition (see "Virtual Portals" on page 4). This chapter explains how to add, edit, and delete virtual portals, as well as log in to any virtual portal and manage its contents. The tasks in this chapter can be performed in the Global Administration View only. In This Chapter Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 286 Adding and Editing Virtual Portals ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 287 Viewing Virtual Portals ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 288 Assigning Virtual Portals to Global Plans -------------------------------------------------------------------- 290 Adding Global Add-ons to Virtual Portals ------------------------------------------------------------------- 291 Exporting Virtual Portals to Excel ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 293 Deleting Virtual Portals ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 293 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 285

15 Managing Virtual Portals Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager Most tasks related to managing virtual portals are performed in the Virtual Portal Manager. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To access the Virtual Portal Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Portals. The Main > Portals page appears, displaying all virtual portals in the system. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired portal's row and click Edit Portal. Click on the desired portal's name. 286 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Virtual Portals 15 The Virtual Portal Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. Adding and Editing Virtual Portals This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To add or edit a virtual portal 1 Do one of the following: To add a new virtual portal, in the Main > Portals page, click New Portal. To edit an existing virtual portal, access the Virtual Portal Manager. See Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager (on page 286). The Virtual Portal Manager opens displaying the Profile tab. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 287

15 Managing Virtual Portals Table 53: Virtual Portal Profile Fields In this field... Do this... Name Type Type a name (unique identifier) for the virtual portal. Select the virtual portal's type. For information on portal types, see The CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition (see "Virtual Portals" on page 4). This field is read-only, when editing an existing virtual portal. Catalog Node Server Status Select the virtual portal's catalog node server. Catalog node servers are database servers that store metadata. CTERA Portal supports multiple catalog node servers for scalability. Select the status of the virtual portal to enabled or disabled. If you set the status to disabled, the following things happen: Users cannot log in to the portal, and devices cannot connect. Reports and email notifications are not sent from the portal. User self-registration is disabled. Global administrators can still connect to disabled portals via the Global Administration View. Billing ID Provision quotas for this virtual portal Optionally use this field to enter the virtual portal owner's billing ID. This enables integration of the portal with an external billing system. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. Deselect this box to allow a reseller unlimited quotas (subject only to the limits of the portal license). Viewing Virtual Portals This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view all virtual portals In the navigation pane, click Main > Portals. The Main > Portals page appears, displaying all virtual portals in the system. Reseller portals are indicated by the icon. icon, and team portals are indicated by the The table includes the following columns. 288 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Virtual Portals 15 Table 54: Virtual Portal Fields This field... Displays... Name Status Subscription Plan Add Ons Connected Devices Storage Appliance Licenses Server Agent Licenses Workstation Backup Licenses Cloud Drive Users Billing ID Catalog Node Server The virtual portal's name. To edit the virtual portal, click the portal's name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Virtual Portals (on page 287). The status of the virtual portal (enabled or disabled). If the status is disabled, the following are true: Users cannot log in to the portal, and devices cannot connect. Reports and email notifications are not sent from the portal. User self-registration is disabled. Global administrators can still connect to disabled portals via the Global Administration View. The global plan to which this virtual portal is assigned. To modify the plan, click the plan's name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Subscription Plans (on page 253). The number of add-ons for the virtual portal. To modify the list of add-ons, click on the number. For further details, see Adding and Editing Add-ons (on page 268). The number of devices currently connected to the virtual portal. The amount of storage in use by the virtual portal, out of the total provisioned amount. The number of CTERA appliance licenses in use by the virtual portal, out of the total provisioned number. The number of CTERA Server Agent licenses in use by the virtual portal, out of the total provisioned number. The total number of CTERA Workstation Backup licenses in use by the virtual portal, out of the total provisioned number. The number of Cloud Drive licenses in use by the virtual portal, out of the total provisioned number. The number of user accounts defined in the virtual portal. The virtual portal owner's billing ID. The virtual portal's catalog node server. Catalog node servers are database servers that store metadata. CTERA Portal supports multiple catalog node servers for scalability. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 289

15 Managing Virtual Portals Assigning Virtual Portals to Global Plans This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To assign a virtual portal to a global plan 1 Access the Virtual Portal Manager. See Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager (on page 286). 2 If the virtual portal is a reseller portal, select the Provision quotas for this virtual portal check box. 3 Click the Provisioning tab. The Provisioning tab appears. 4 In the Subscription Plan field, click. 290 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Virtual Portals 15 The Select Your Subscription Plan dialog box opens. 5 In the Subscription Plan drop-down list, select the global plan to assign the portal. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Subscription Expiration field, you can click to specify the date on which the portal's subscription to the selected plan should expire. This field is only relevant for plans that are defined as time limited trial plans. Otherwise the field is disabled. 8 Click Save. The virtual portal is assigned to the subscription plan. Adding Global Add-ons to Virtual Portals This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To add global add-ons to a virtual portal 1 Access the Virtual Portal Manager. See Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager (on page 286). 2 If the virtual portal is a reseller portal, select the Provision quotas for this virtual portal check box. 3 Click the Provisioning tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 291

15 Managing Virtual Portals The Provisioning tab appears. 4 To add an add-on for the virtual portal, do the following: a In the drop-down list, select the desired add-on. b Click Add. The global add-on appears in the list box. c In the add-on's row in the list box, click in the Valid For column, then click. A calendar appears. d Select the date on which the add-on subscription should end. The Expiration column is updated accordingly. 5 To remove an add-on from the virtual portal, in the add-on's row in the list box, click. The add-on is removed. 6 Click Save. The virtual portal is assigned to the add-ons. 292 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Virtual Portals 15 Exporting Virtual Portals to Excel You can export a list of user virtual portals and their details to a Comma Separated Values (*.csv) file on your computer, which you can open with Microsoft Excel. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To export virtual portals to Excel 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Portals. The Main > Portals page appears, displaying all virtual portals in the system. 2 Click Export to Excel. The virtual portals are exported. Deleting Virtual Portals Warning When a virtual portal is deleted, all of its contents are deleted as well. Deleted portals cannot be recovered. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To delete a virtual portal 1 Do one of the following: In the Main > Portals page, select the desired portal's row, then click Delete Portal. Access the Virtual Portal Manager, then click Delete. See Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager (on page 286). A confirmation message appears. 2 Click Yes. The virtual portal and all of its contents are deleted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 293

16 Managing Servers Global administrators can manage the servers on which CTERA Portal is installed. This chapter explains how to manage servers. The tasks in this chapter can be performed in the Global Administration View only. In This Chapter Accessing the Server Manager -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 296 Editing Server General Settings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 297 Configuring a Server as a Catalog Node --------------------------------------------------------------------- 298 Viewing Connected Devices ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 298 Monitoring Server Activity ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 299 Viewing Server Tasks -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 301 Viewing Servers' Statuses--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 304 Restarting Servers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 305 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 295

16 Managing Servers Accessing the Server Manager Tasks related to managing and monitoring a server are performed in the Server Manager. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To access the Server Manager 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Servers. The Main > Servers page appears, displaying all servers. 2 Do one of the following: Select the desired server's row and click View. Click on the desired server's name. The Server Manager opens displaying the General Settings tab. 296 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Servers 16 Editing Server General Settings You can edit a server's settings, including configuring a server as a catalog node and/or application server, setting the public IP address of the server, and the IP address to which each virtual portal's DNS should resolve. This allows you to restrict specific portals to be accessible only from a specific network interface. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To edit a server's general settings 1 Access the Server Manager. See Accessing the Server Manager (on page 296). 2 In the Name field, type a unique identifier for the server. 3 To configure the server to act as an application server, select the Act as application server checkbox. An application server accepts CTTP connections from devices and HTTPS connections from end users and CTERA Mobile. If the checkbox is unchecked, this server will not allow any client logins. 4 To configure the server to act as a catalog node, select the Catalog Node checkbox. A catalog node is a database server used to store file metadata. 5 To declare that the server's default IP address has a public Network Address Translation (NAT) address, check the Public NAT Address checkbox and type the public IP address in the field. This controls the default IP address of this server that is exposed using DNS. 6 By default, the portal listens to virtual portals on the default address. You can optionally bind specific virtual portals to other interfaces (specified by IP address) of the server, which will cause this IP address to be published by the DNS server, and will prevent access to the specified portal via other IP addresses of the server. To set custom address mappings, do the following: a Select the Custom Address Mappings check box. The Custom Address Mappings table is enabled. b For each virtual portal that should be bound to an IP address of the server, do the following: 1 In the virtual portal's row, click in the IP Address field, then type the IP address to be translated. This should be the IP address of the local interface which should accept connections for clients of the specified virtual portal. To bind this virtual portal to the default IP address, do not enter a value in this field. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 297

16 Managing Servers 2 If NAT is used, and the public IP address of the interface differs from the private IP address, click in the NAT IP Address field in the virtual portal's row, and then type the IP address to which the original IP address should be translated. This public address will be published by the CTERA Portal DNS server. To specify that the public IP address is equal to the private IP address, do not enter a value in this field. 7 Click Save. Configuring a Server as a Catalog Node CTERA Portal supports multiple catalog nodes (metadata database servers). The Server Manager enables you to configure a server to act as a catalog node. To configure a CTERA Portal server to act as a catalog node 1 Access the Server Manager. See Accessing the Server Manager (on page 296). 2 Select the Catalog Node checkbox. 3 Click Save. Viewing Connected Devices You can view information about a server's currently connected devices. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view a server's currently connected devices 1 Access the Server Manager. See Accessing the Server Manager (on page 296). 2 Click the Clients tab. The Clients tab appears. 298 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Servers 16 For information on the Client tab fields, see the following table. Table 55: Server Clients Fields This field... Displays... Name Owner Total In Total Out Average In Average Out In Backup Connected Since The name of the client device. The name of the client device's owner. The total CTTP traffic sent from the client device to the virtual portal. The total CTTP traffic sent from the virtual portal to the client device. The average speed (throughput) of traffic sent from the client device to the virtual portal in bytes/second. The average speed (throughput) of traffic sent from the virtual portal to the client device in bytes/second. Indicates whether the client device is currently backing up files to the CTERA Portal. Devices in backup are marked with the icon; otherwise, no icon appears. The date and time of connected. Monitoring Server Activity You can view charts displaying a server's activity data. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view a server's activity 1 Access the Server Manager. See Accessing the Server Manager (on page 296). 2 Click the Activity tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 299

16 Managing Servers The Activity tab appears. For information on the charts displayed, see the following table. 300 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Servers 16 Table 56: Server Activity Charts This chart... Displays... Load Average Java RAM Usage (MB) Storage Traffic In (KB/Second) Storage Traffic Out (KB/Second) Storage Operation In (IO/Second) Storage Operation Out (IO/Second) CTTP Traffic In (KB/Second) CTTP Traffic Out (KB/Second) Blocks Reclaimed (Blocks/Second) Blocks Verification Counter (OPP/Minute) The server's average load over time. A server's load is the number of currently running processes that are using, or waiting to use, the CPU. The server's Java RAM usage in MB over time. The incoming storage traffic in KB/second over time. The outgoing storage traffic in KB/second over time. The number of read operations performed by the CTERA Portal on cloud storage nodes. The number of store operations performed by the CTERA Portal on cloud storage nodes. The incoming CTTP traffic in KB/second over time. The outgoing CTTP traffic in KB/second over time. The number of blocks deleted per second, as part of system maintenance. The number of block verifications per minute. Block verifications are executed when the portal is executing a consistency check as part of system maintenance. Open Database Connections The number of open database connections over time. Logged In Users Connected Devices The number of CTERA Portal administrators logged in over time. The number of connected client devices over time. Viewing Server Tasks You can view the server's currently running tasks and completed tasks. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view a server's tasks 1 Access the Server Manager. See Accessing the Server Manager (on page 296). 2 Click the Tasks tab. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 301

16 Managing Servers The Tasks tab appears. 3 Do any of the following: To view currently running tasks, clicks the Running Tasks sub-tab. To view completed tasks, clicks the Recently Completed sub-tab. To view scheduled tasks that have not yet been started, clicks the Scheduled Tasks sub-tab. The relevant information appears. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 302 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Servers 16 Table 57: Server Tasks Fields This field... Displays... Task Status The type of task. This can be any of the following: Unused block cleaner Agent licensing refresh Alert sender FSCK Inactive account cleaner Expired invitations cleaner Logs Cleaner Generate user notifications Notification suppress cleaner Report generator Snapshot consolidator Snapshot cleaner Storage usage calculator Certificate update Update user accounts The task's status. This can be any of the following:. Completed successfully.. In progress.. Failed. This field is not relevant for scheduled tasks. Start Duration Progress Message The date and time at which the task started or is scheduled to start. The amount of time the task took, or has taken so far. This field is not relevant for scheduled tasks. The task's progress. This field is not relevant for scheduled tasks. Additional information about the task. This field is not relevant for scheduled tasks. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 303

16 Managing Servers Viewing Servers' Statuses You can view the current status of servers. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view servers' statuses 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Servers. The Main > Servers page appears, displaying all servers. The Status column displays the current status of each server (Connected / Not Connected). 2 Access the Server Manager. See Accessing the Server Manager (on page 296). 3 Click the Status tab. The Status tab appears. For information on the Status tab fields, see the following table. 304 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Servers 16 Table 58: Server Manager Status Fields In this field... Do this... Storage Pools Address DB Connected Main DB Server Operating System RAM Number of CPUs Portal Version Platform Image Version Uptime The status and amount of free storage on each server storage pool. This field appears only if the CTERA Portal is installed on the OpenSolaris platform. The server's domain name followed by its IP address. States whether the DB is connected to the CTERA Portal application. States whether the server is the main DB server of the CTERA Portal installation. The server's operating system. The server's RAM followed by the amount of free space. The number of CPUs on the server. The CTERA Portal version installed on the server. The platform on which the CTERA Portal is installed. The version number of the server image. The number of days and hours that the server has been up. Tomcat Uptime The number of days and hours that the application server (Tomcat) has been up. Restarting Servers CTERA Portal servers can be restarted from the CTERA Portal web page. To restart a server 1 Access the Server Manager. See Accessing the Server Manager (on page 296). 2 Select the server you want to restart. 3 Click Restart. The server is restarted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 305

16 Managing Seeding Stations Managing Seeding Stations Seeding stations must be added by a global administrator in order to be available for importing seed drives. Adding Seeding Stations This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To add a seeding station 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Seeding Stations. The Seeding Stations page appears. 306 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Seeding Stations 16 2 Click New Station. The Seeding Station Details dialog box appears. 3 In the Seeding Station Name field, enter the name by which you want to identify the NFS server. This name will appear in a dropdown box for portal users who are importing a seeding drive. 4 In the NFS Server Address field, enter the IP address or DNS name of the NFS server. 5 In the NFS Path field, enter the path to your seeding drive on the NFS server. 6 Click Save. The seeding station is added to the list of available seeding s\tations. Viewing Seeding Stations This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view all seeding stations In the navigation pane, click Settings > Seeding Stations. The Settings > Seeding Stations page appears, displaying all seeding stations. The table includes the following columns. Table 59: Seeding Stations Fields This field... Displays... Name Address Path The seeding station's name. The seeding station's IP address. The path from the portal to the seeding station. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 307

16 Managing Seeding Stations Deleting Seeding Stations This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To delete a seeding station 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Seeding Stations. The Settings > Seeding Stations page appears, displaying all seeding stations. 2 Select the desired seeding station's row. 3 Click Delete Station. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The seeding station is deleted. 308 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

17 Managing Firmware Images Each device (CTERA cloud gateway or CTERA Agent) in the CTERA Portal system is installed with a firmware image that suits the device platform. (For convenience, we refer to CTERA Agent software packages as a type of "firmware"). This chapter explains how to manage firmware images. The tasks in this chapter can be performed in the Global Administration View only. In This Chapter Uploading Firmware Images ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 310 Viewing Firmware Images -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 312 Marking a Firmware Image as the Current Firmware Image ------------------------------------------- 312 Deleting Firmware Images -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 313 Viewing Devices that Use a Specific Firmware Image --------------------------------------------------- 313 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 309

17 Managing Firmware Images Uploading Firmware Images This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To upload a firmware image 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Firmware Repository. The Main > Firmware Repository page appears, displaying all firmware images. 2 Click Upload. 310 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Firmware Images 17 The Upload Firmware Wizard opens displaying the Upload Firmware dialog box. 3 Click Upload and browse to the desired *.tgz file. The firmware image is uploaded to the relevant device platform category. At the end of the upload process, the Completing the Upload Firmware Wizard screen appears. 4 Click Finish. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 311

17 Managing Firmware Images Viewing Firmware Images This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view all firmware images in the system In the navigation pane, click Main > Firmware Repository. The Main > Firmware Repository page appears. The firmware images and their device platform categories are displayed in a tree. The current firmware image for each platform is marked with a image sizes are specified. icon, and the firmware Marking a Firmware Image as the Current Firmware Image When you mark a firmware image as the current firmware image, all devices of the relevant device platform that are set to automatically download firmware images will download this firmware image. There can only be one current firmware image per device platform. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To mark a firmware image as the current firmware image 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Firmware Repository. The Main > Firmware Repository page appears, displaying all firmware images. 2 Select the desired firmware image's row. 3 Click Mark as Current. The selected firmware image becomes the current firmware image and is marked with the icon. To mark a firmware image as not current 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Firmware Repository. The Main > Firmware Repository page appears, displaying all firmware images. 2 Select the desired firmware image's row. 3 Click Remove Current. The selected firmware image is marked with the icon. 312 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Firmware Images 17 Deleting Firmware Images This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To delete a firmware image 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Firmware Repository. The Main > Firmware Repository page appears, displaying all firmware images. 2 Select the desired firmware image's row. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The firmware image is deleted. Viewing Devices that Use a Specific Firmware Image You can view all devices that are configured to use a specific firmware. To view devices with a specific firmware configured 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Firmware Repository. The Main > Firmware Repository page appears, displaying all firmware images. 2 Click on the firmware image you want to search for. 3 Click Show devices. The Main > Devices page appears, displaying the devices that are configured to use the specified firmware. Tip You can achieve the same results by searching for the desired firmware in the Main > Device page. See Searching Tables (on page 23). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 313

18 Managing Storage Nodes The CTERA Portal stores data on storage nodes. This chapter explains how to manage storage nodes. The tasks in this chapter can be performed in the Global Administration View only. In This Chapter Adding and Editing Storage Nodes --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 315 Viewing Storage Nodes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 349 Deleting Storage Nodes ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 350 Adding and Editing Storage Nodes This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To add or edit a storage node 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Storage Nodes. The Main > Storage Nodes page appears, displaying all storage nodes. 2 Do one of the following: To add a new storage node, click New. To edit an existing storage node, select the desired node's row and then click Edit. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 315

18 Managing Storage Nodes The Storage Node Wizard opens displaying the Storage Node Wizard dialog box. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Next. Do one of the following: If you selected Amazon S3, continue at Using an Amazon S3 Storage Node (on page 318). If you selected Caringo Storage, continue at Using a Caringo Storage Node (on page 319). If you selected Cleversafe, continue at Using a Cleversafe Storage Node (on page 323). If you selected Cloudian, continue at Using a Cloudian Storage Node (on page 324). If you selected CTERA Cloud FS, continue at Using a CTERA Cloud FS Storage Node (on page 326). If you selected Dell DX, continue at Using a Dell DX Object Storage Platform Storage Node (on page 328). If you selected DDN Web Object Scaler, continue at Using a DDN Web Object Scaler Storage Node (see "Using a DDN Web Object Scaler (WOS) Storage Node" on page 332). If you selected EMC Atmos, continue at Using an EMC Atmos Storage Node (on page 333). 316 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 If you selected EMC Isilon (NFS), continue at Using an EMC Isilon (NFS) Storage Node (on page 335). If you selected EMC ViPR (Atmos), continue at Using an EMC ViPR (Atmos) Storage Node (on page 336). If you selected EMC ViPR (S3), continue at Using an EMC ViPR (S3) Storage Node (on page 338). If you selected Hitachi HCP, continue at Using a Hitachi Content Platform Storage Node (on page 339). If you selected IBM GPFS, continue at Using an IBM GPFS Storage Node (on page 341). If you selected OpenStack Swift, continue at Using an OpenStack Swift Storage Node (on page 343). If you selected OpenStack Swift (KeyStone), continue at Using an OpenStack Swift (KeyStone) Storage Node (on page 344). If you selected Scality (S3 API), continue at Using a Scality (S3 API) Storage Node (on page 346). If you selected Scality RING, continue at Using a Scality RING Storage Node (on page 348). Table 60: Storage Node Fields In this field... Do this... Type Storage Node Name Operation Mode Select the storage node type. Type a name (unique identifier) for the storage node. Choose the desired operation mode for the storage node. This can be either of the following: Read / Write. New data blocks can be stored on the storage node. Read-Only. New data blocks cannot be stored on the storage node. Instead, they will be directed to storage nodes that are in Read/Write mode. Note: CTERA Portal will delete blocks that are deemed to be no longer in use, even if the storage node is in Read-Only mode. Dedicated to Portal Select the checkbox if you want to dedicate the storage node to one virtual portal. Select the virtual portal from the dropdown list. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 317

18 Managing Storage Nodes Using an Amazon S3 Storage Node The Amazon S3 dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. 318 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 3 Click Finish. Table 61: Amazon S3 Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name Access Key ID Secret Access Key Endpoint Use HTTPS Type your Amazon S3 bucket. Type your Amazon S3 access key ID. Type your Amazon S3 storage node's secret access key. Type the endpoint name of the S3 service. The default value is s3.amazonaws.com. Normally, this value should not be changed. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. Using a Caringo Storage Node The Caringo Storage dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 319

18 Managing Storage Nodes If you selected Static Members in the Discover mode field, the fields change. Do the following: a Add each cluster member's address, by typing the cluster member's address in the field provided, and then clicking Add. A row appears in the table. b To delete a cluster member's address, click in its row. 2 Click Next. 320 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 A second Caringo Storage dialog box appears. 3 Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table. 4 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. 5 Click Finish. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 321

18 Managing Storage Nodes Table 62: Caringo Storage Fields In this field... Do this... Discovery mode Proxy Address Cluster Name Use HTTPS only Use Named Objects Domain Bucket Username Password Select the discovery method to use to detect cluster members: Use SCSP Proxy. Use automatic discovery. Static Members. Specify cluster members manually. Type the IP address or DNS name of your Caringo Storage Node SCSP Proxy Server. Type your Caringo Storage Node cluster name. Select this option to use only HTTPS to connect with the storage node. If this option is not selected, HTTP will be used instead. Note: Enabling HTTPS reduces performance. Select this option to use named objects. This is recommended if multi-tenancy is required, (that is, if the Caringo Storage Node cluster is shared by other applications or portals). If this option is not selected, objects will be stored as unnamed objects. If Caringo Storage Node is segmented into multiple domains, (each with its own security and authentication and each subdivided into "buckets"), type the relevant domain's name. Type the name of your Caringo Storage Node bucket. This field is optional. Type your user ID for accessing Caringo Storage Node. Type your password for accessing Caringo Storage Node. 322 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 Using a Cleversafe Storage Node The Cleversafe dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 323

18 Managing Storage Nodes 3 Click Finish. Table 63: Cleversafe Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name Access Key ID Secret Access Key Endpoint Use HTTPS Type your Cleversafe bucket. Type your Cleversafe access key ID. Type your Cleversafe storage node's secret access key. Type the endpoint name of the Cleversafe service. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. Using a Cloudian Storage Node The Cloudian dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. 324 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. Table 64: Cloudian Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name Access Key ID Secret Access Key Endpoint Use HTTPS Type your Cloudian bucket. Type your Cloudian access key ID. Type your Cloudian storage node's secret access key. Type the endpoint name of the Cloudian service. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 325

18 Managing Storage Nodes Using a CTERA Cloud FS Storage Node When using a CTERA Cloud FS storage node, data blocks are stored in a specific folder in the primary CTERA Portal server's local file system. CTERA Portal servers set to secondary mode access the storage node by communicating through the primary CTERA Portal server. Tip When using this type of storage node, it is recommended to set the de-duplication block size to 512KB or larger. The CTERA Cloud FS dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. 326 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. Table 65: CTERA Cloud FS Fields In this field... Do this... Host Address Folder Path Files per Folder Use fsync Type the host address of the primary server. Type the path in where files should be stored in the local file system. Type the maximum number of files to store in a folder. The default value is 1024. Select this option to specify that blocks of data should be flushed to disk immediately. Using fsync prevents data loss in the event of a power failure. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 327

18 Managing Storage Nodes Using a Dell DX Object Storage Platform Storage Node The Dell DX dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table. If you selected Static Members in the Discover mode field, the fields change. 328 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 Do the following: a Add each cluster member's address, by typing the cluster member's address in the field provided, and then clicking Add. A row appears in the table. b To delete a cluster member's address, click in its row. 2 Click Next. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 329

18 Managing Storage Nodes A second Dell DX dialog box appears. 3 Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table. 4 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. 5 Click Finish. 330 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 Table 66: Dell DX Fields In this field... Do this... Discovery mode Proxy Address Cluster Name Use HTTPS Use Named Objects Domain Bucket Username Password Select the discovery method to use to detect cluster members: Use SCSP Proxy. Use automatic discovery. Static Members. Specify cluster members manually. Type the IP address or DNS name of your Dell DX SCSP Proxy Server. Type your Dell DX cluster name. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. If this option is not selected, HTTP will be used instead. Note: Enabling HTTPS reduces performance. Select this option to use named objects. This is recommended if multi-tenancy is required, (that is, if the Dell DX cluster is shared by other applications or portals). If this option is not selected, objects will be stored as unnamed objects. If Dell DX is segmented into multiple domains, (each with its own security and authentication and each subdivided into "buckets"), type the relevant domain's name. Type the name of your Dell DX bucket. This field is optional. Type your user ID for accessing Dell DX. Type your password for accessing Dell DX. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 331

18 Managing Storage Nodes Using a DDN Web Object Scaler (WOS) Storage Node The DDN Web Object Scaler dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. 332 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 3 Click Finish. Table 67: DDN Web Object Scaler Fields In this field... Do this... Primary Node Address Secondary Node Address Policy Name Type the primary node address of your DDN Web Object Scaler storage node. Type the secondary node address of your DDN Web Object Scaler storage node. Type the policy name of your DDN Web Object Scaler storage node. Using an EMC Atmos Storage Node The EMC Atmos dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 333

18 Managing Storage Nodes The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. Table 68: EMC Atmos Fields In this field... Do this... Full Token Id Access Point Shared Secret Use HTTPS Type your EMC Atmos full token ID. Type the host name of the EMC Atmos storage node. Type your EMC Atmos shared secret. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. 334 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 Using an EMC Isilon (NFS) Storage Node The EMC Isilon (NFS) dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 335

18 Managing Storage Nodes Table 69: EMC Isilon (NFS) Fields In this field... Do this... Host Address Files per Folder Use fsync Type the host address of the primary server. Type the maximum number of files to store in a folder. The default value is 1024. Select this option to specify that blocks of data should be flushed to disk immediately. Using fsync prevents data loss in the event of a power failure. Using an EMC ViPR (Atmos) Storage Node The EMC ViPR (Atmos) dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. 336 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 The Wizard Completed screen appears. Click Finish. Table 70: EMC ViPR (Atmos) Fields In this field... Do this... Full Token Id Access Point Shared Secret Use HTTPS Type your EMC ViPR (Atmos) full token ID. Type the host name of the EMC ViPR (Atmos) storage node. Type your EMC ViPR (Atmos) shared secret. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 337

18 Managing Storage Nodes Using an EMC ViPR (S3) Storage Node The EMCViPR (S3) dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. 338 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 Table 71: EMC ViPR (S3) Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name Access Key ID Secret Access Key Endpoint Use HTTPS Type your EMC ViPR (S3) bucket. Type your EMC ViPR (S3) access key ID. Type your EMC ViPR (S3) storage node's secret access key. Type the endpoint name of the S3 service. The default value is s3.amazonaws.com. Normally, this value should not be changed. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. Using a Hitachi Content Platform Storage Node The Hitachi HCP dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 339

18 Managing Storage Nodes The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. Table 72: Hitachi HCP Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name User Password Use HTTPS Type the name of your Hitachi HCP bucket. Type your user ID for accessing Hitachi HCP. Type your password for accessing Hitachi HCP. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. If this option is not selected, HTTP will be used instead. Note: Enabling HTTPS reduces performance. 340 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 Using an IBM GPFS Storage Node The IBM General Parallel File System (GPFS) is a high-performance cluster file system, meaning that it provides concurrent access to a single file system or set of file systems from multiple nodes. These nodes can be all be SAN attached, or a combination of SAN and network attached. This enables high performance access to a common set of data, in order to support a scale-out solution or provide a high availability platform. When using CTERA Portal with IBM GPFS, CTERA Portal servers have active-active access to the stored data. This means that each CTERA Portal server has equal and independent access to the data stored by all other CTERA Portal servers. If one CTERA Portal server fails, another server immediately and transparently takes its place. In addition, the CTERA Portal database can be stored on the GPFS file system. Tip When using this type of storage node, it is recommended to set the de-duplication block size to 512KB. The IBM GPFS dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 341

18 Managing Storage Nodes The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. Table 73: IBM GPFS Fields In this field... Do this... Storage Path Files per Folder Use fsync Type the path in where files should be stored in the GPFS file system. Type the maximum number of files to store in a folder. The default value is 1024. Select this option to specify that blocks of data should be flushed to disk immediately. Using fsync prevents data loss in the event of a power failure. 342 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 Using an OpenStack Swift Storage Node The OpenStack Swift dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 343

18 Managing Storage Nodes 3 Click Finish. Table 74: OpenStack Swift Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name Username API Key Endpoint Type your OpenStack Swift bucket. Type your user ID for accessing OpenStack Swift. Type your OpenStack Swift API key. Type the endpoint name of the OpenStack Swift service. Using an OpenStack Swift (KeyStone) Storage Node The OpenStack Swift (KeyStone) dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. 344 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. Table 75: OpenStack Swift (KeyStone) Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name Tenant Username Password Authentication URL Type your OpenStack Swift (Keystone) bucket. Type your OpenStack Swift (Keystone) tenant. Type your user ID for accessing OpenStack Swift (Keystone). Type your password for accessing OpenStack Swift (Keystone). Type your OpenStack Swift (Keystone) authentication URL. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 345

18 Managing Storage Nodes Using a Scality (S3 API) Storage Node The Scality (S3 API) dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. 346 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 3 Click Finish. Table 76: Scality (S3 API) Fields In this field... Do this... Bucket Name Access Key ID Secret Access Key Endpoint Use HTTPS Type your Scality (S3 API) bucket. Type your Scality (S3 API) access key ID. Type your Scality (S3 API) storage node's secret access key. Type the endpoint name of the Scality (S3 API) service. Select this option to use HTTPS to connect with the storage node. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 347

18 Managing Storage Nodes Using a Scality RING Storage Node The Scality RING storage node is a high-performance cluster file system, meaning that it provides concurrent access to a single file system or set of file systems from multiple nodes. These nodes can be all be SAN attached, or a combination of SAN and network attached. This enables high performance access to a common set of data, in order to support a scale-out solution or provide a high availability platform. When using CTERA Portal with Scality RING, CTERA Portal servers have active-active access to the stored data. This means that each CTERA Portal server has equal and independent access to the data stored by all other CTERA Portal servers. If one CTERA Portal server fails, another server immediately and transparently takes its place. In addition, the CTERA Portal database can be stored on the Scality RING file system. Tip When using this type of storage node, it is recommended to set the de-duplication block size to 512KB. The Scality RING dialog box appears. 1 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 2 Click Next. 348 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 The Wizard Completed screen appears. 3 Click Finish. Table 77: Scality RING Fields In this field... Do this... Storage Path Files per Folder Use fsync Type the path in where files should be stored in the Scality RING file system. Type the maximum number of files to store in a folder. The default value is 1024. Select this option to specify that blocks of data should be flushed to disk immediately. Using fsync prevents data loss in the event of a power failure. Viewing Storage Nodes This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To view all storage nodes in the system In the navigation pane, click Main > Storage Nodes. The Main > Storage Nodes page appears, displaying all storage nodes. The table includes the following columns. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 349

18 Managing Storage Nodes Table 78: Storage Nodes Fields This field... Displays... Name Type Bucket Operation Mode Dedicated to Status Storage Usage The storage node's name. To edit the storage node, click the storage node name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Storage Nodes (on page 315). The storage node's type. The name of the storage node's bucket. The storage node's operation mode. This can be any of the following: Read/Write Read Only The name of a single virtual portal to which the storage node is dedicated, if applicable. The storage node's current status. This can be either of the following: Connected Not Connected Note: The system will not attempt to store new blocks in storage nodes that are not connected. The amount of storage used, followed by the amount of free space. This field is relevant for CTERA storage nodes only. Note: The system will not attempt to store new blocks in storage nodes that are out of disk space. Deleting Storage Nodes This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To delete a storage node 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Storage Nodes. The Main > Storage Nodes page appears, displaying all storage nodes. 2 Select the desired storage node's row. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The storage node is deleted. 350 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Managing Storage Nodes 18 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 351

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 This chapter explains how to import and export customer's data to and from the CTERA Portal. In This Chapter Importing Folders Over NFS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 353 Exporting Folders ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 367 Importing Folders Over NFS When an end user has a lot of information to back up, the initial backup to the cloud can take a long time. You can speed up initial backup for your customers by offering a backup seeding service. Customers who are subscribed to this service can store the files they want to include in the initial backup on a selected hard drive called a seeding hard drive, and then deliver the seeding hard drive to you, the CTERA Portal owner. Tip The seeding hard drive can optionally be encrypted using strong encryption (AES-256 + RSA) so even if the drive is lost, there is very little risk to the customer s sensitive information while in transit. You then perform backup seeding, that is, you create the customer's initial backup by importing folders directly from the hard drive you received. The CTERA Portal includes a special utility for performing backup seeding over the NFS protocol. The import is performed by attaching the seeding hard drive to a seeding station, which is a CTERA Cloud Gateway that is connected to the CTERA Portal's LAN. Tip All CTERA Cloud Gateway models are supported. To import folders over NFS 1 Prepare for seeding. See Preparing for Seeding (on page 354). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 353

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) Tip You only need to perform this step once, in order to prepare the seeding station and the seeding hard drive(s). 2 Perform seeding at the customer premises. See Performing Seeding at the Customer Premises (on page 364). 3 Perform seeding import at the CTERA Portal Datacenter. See Performing Seeding Import at the CTERA Portal Datacenter. Preparing for Seeding You only need to perform this step once, in order to prepare the seeding station and the seeding hard drive(s). To prepare for seeding 1 Connect the seeding station to the CTERA Portal's LAN. 2 Log in to the seeding station's Web interface. 3 Disable autosharing, by doing the following: a In the Configuration tab's navigation pane, click Share > Shares. The Share > Shares page appears. b Click Advanced. 354 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 The Advanced file sharing settings dialog box opens. c Clear the If removable drive is plugged in, auto-create share with these permissions check box. d Click Finish. 4 Take the seeding hard drive and connect it to the seeding station. 5 Format the seeding hard drive, by doing the following: a In the Configuration tab's navigation pane, click Storage > Arrays or Storage > Volumes. The relevant page appears. b Click Storage Setup Wizard. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 355

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) The Easy Storage Setup Wizard opens, displaying the Easy Storage Setup dialog box. c Click Format next to the seeding hard drive. A confirmation message appears. d Click Yes. The drive is formatted, and all of its contents are erased. e Click Next. 356 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 The Proposed Actions dialog box appears describing the changes. f Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. g Click Finish. 6 Rename the new volume to "seeding", by doing the following: a In the Configuration tab's navigation pane, click Storage > Volumes. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 357

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) The Storage > Volumes page appears. b Click on the new volume's name. The Logical Volume Wizard opens, displaying the Specify Volume Details dialog box. c Click Next. 358 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 The Name this Logical Volume dialog box appears. d In the Volume Name field, type "seeding". e Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. f Click Finish. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 359

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 7 Create a new NFS-enabled share named "seeding" in the root of the "seeding" volume, by doing the following: a In the Configuration tab's navigation pane, click Share > Shares. The Share > Shares page appears. b Click New Share. The Network Share Wizard opens, displaying the Select a Folder to Share dialog box appears. 360 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 c Select the "seeding" folder. d Click Next. The Specify the Network Share Name dialog box appears. e In the Network Share Name field, type "seeding". f Click Next. The Sharing Protocols dialog box appears. g Click Next. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 361

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) The NFS (UNIX File Sharing) dialog box appears. h Select the Enable NFS access check box. i Add the CTERA Portal server's IP addresses as NFS clients, by doing the following: 1 Click New. A row appears in the table. 2 Click in the Host column and type the IP address. 3 Click in the Netmask column and edit the netmask. 362 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 4 Click in the Permission column and select the permitted level of access to the network share via NFS. j Click Next. The Configure Permissions dialog box appears. k Click Next. The Wizard Completed screen appears. l Click Finish. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 363

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) The network share is added. 8 Ship the seeding hard drive to the customer premises. Performing Seeding at the Customer Premises To perform seeding at the customer premises 1 Connect the seeding hard drive to the source cloud gateway. 2 Select the files and folders you want to include in the initial backup. See the Cloud Gateway's user guide for information about how to select files and folders for Cloud Backup. These files and folders will be written to the seeding drive. 3 Log in to the cloud gateway's Web interface. 4 In the Configuration tab's navigation pane, click Cloud Backup > Control Panel. The Control Panel page appears. 5 Click Seeding. 364 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 The Select seeding destination dialog box appears. 6 Choose the "seeding" volume. 7 To encrypt the seeding drive, select the Use encryption check box. 8 Click Finish. A confirmation message appears. 9 Click Yes. The selected files and folders are written to the seeding drive. Importing the Seeding Drive You can import a portable seeding hard drive by mounting it on a local NFS server and running the Seeding wizard. Tip The details of the NFS server on which you mount your seeding drive must be added to the portal by an administrator in the global administration view before you can import the seeding drive. See Managing Seeding Stations (on page 306). To import a seeding hard drive 1 Mount your portable seeding hard drive on a locally accessible NFS server. 2 In the navigation pane, click Folders > Seeding. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 365

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) The Folders > Seeding page appears. 3 Click Import. The Seeding wizard appears. 4 From the NFS Server dropdown list, select the NFS Server on which you mounted your seeding drive. 5 Click Next. The Confirmation screen appears. 366 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 6 Click Next. Files are imported from the seeding hard drive, and the Importing Files window opens displaying Running screen with a progress bar that tracks the operation's progress. To stop the process, click Stop. To close the progress bar, while the process continues in the background, click Continue in Background. When the operation is complete, the Completed screen appears. 7 Click Close. Exporting Folders You can perform large restore operations by exporting folders from the CTERA Portal onto a portable hard drive or a new device, and delivering it to the customer. To export folders 1 Mount a hard drive on one of the CTERA Portal servers. 2 In the command line, enter the following command: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 367

19 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) telnet localhost 3 Enter the following command: login admin admin username Where username is your CTERA Portal global administrator user name. You are prompted for your password. 4 Enter your password. 5 To export a snapshot of the folder other than the current one, do the following: a Enter the following command: snapshot list /portals/portal-name/backups/folder-name Where: portal-name is the name of the virtual portal on which the desired backup folder is located. folder-name is the name of the backup folder for which you want to view a list of snapshots. A list of folder snapshots appears, for example: 1351722386000-01.11.2012 12-26-26 AM 1351724574000-01.11.2012 1-02-54 AM 1351796267000-01.11.2012 8-57-47 PM 1351864966000-02.11.2012 4-02-46 PM b Take note of the ID of the snapshot you want to export. The snapshot ID is the long number at the beginning of each row. 6 Enter the following command: export-folder /portals/portal-name/backups/folder-type path destination-path [snapshot-id] Where: portal-name is the name of the virtual portal on which the desired backup folder is located. folder-type is the folder's type: either "backups" or "homefolders". path is the path within the cloud folder to export. All files and subfolders located under this path will be exported. Use a slash "/" to export the entire cloud folder. 368 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 19 destination-path is the path to the hard drive. snapshot-id is the ID of the snapshot you want to export. If you do not include this parameter, the current snapshot will be exported. The following things happen: If the folder is passphrase-protected, you are prompted to enter a passphrase. Enter you passphrase. The folder is exported to the selected destination folder. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 369

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal This chapter explains how to use the Status Dashboard, CTERA Portal reports, CTERA Portal logs, and other means to monitor your CTERA Portal. In order to monitoring an individual virtual portal, perform these tasks within the desired portal. In order to monitor all virtual portals in the system, these tasks must be performed in the Global Administration View. In This Chapter Viewing the Status Dashboard -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 371 Viewing Reports --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 375 Configuring Logging ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 389 Viewing Logs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 392 Clearing Logs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 407 Using CTERA Portal Email Notifications --------------------------------------------------------------------- 407 Using Email Alerts ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 415 Viewing the Status Dashboard The Status Dashboard provides an overview of the CTERA Portal's current status, including the following: The amount of cloud storage provisioned and used The number of CTERA Agent licenses provisioned and used The connection status of all device types in the CTERA Portal system The number of new devices and users in the CTERA Portal system To view the Status Dashboard In the navigation pane, click Main > Dashboard. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 371

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal The Main > Dashboard page appears. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. Tip The data is automatically refreshed, every few seconds. 372 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 79: Status Dashboard Fields This field... Displays... Cloud Storage (GB) Limit Provisioned In Use The total amount of cloud storage available for this virtual portal in GB, over the past month. This field does not appear in the Global Administration View. The amount of cloud storage space provisioned to portal users in GB, over the past month. The amount of cloud storage space used by portal users in GB, over the past month. Users New (last 30 days) New today Total The number of new users added to the system, over the last 30 days. The number of new users added to the system today. The total number of users in the system, over the past month. Server Agent Licenses Limit Provisioned In Use The total number of CTERA Server Agent licenses available for this virtual portal, over the past month. This field does not appear in the Global Administration View. The number of CTERA Server Agent licenses provisioned to portal users, over the past month. The number of CTERA Server Agent licenses used by portal users, over the past month. Workstation Backup Licenses Limit Provisioned In Use The total number of CTERA Workstation Backup licenses available for this virtual portal, over the past month. This field does not appear in the Global Administration View. The number of CTERA Workstation Backup licenses provisioned to portal users, over the past month. The number of CTERA Workstation Backup licenses used by portal users, over the past month. Cloud Drive Licenses Limit The total number of CTERA Cloud Drive licenses available for this virtual portal, over the past month. This field does not appear in the Global Administration View. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 373

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Provisioned In Use The number of CTERA Cloud Drive licenses provisioned to portal users, over the past month. The number of CTERA Cloud Drive licenses used by portal users, over the past month. Appliance Licenses Limit Provisioned In Use The total number of CTERA Appliance licenses available for this virtual portal, over the past month. This field does not appear in the Global Administration View. The number of CTERA Appliance licenses provisioned to portal users, over the past month. The number of CTERA Appliance licenses used by portal users, over the past month. Devices by Type Connected Disconnected Total The number of devices that are currently connected to the CTERA Portal. The number of devices that are currently not connected to the CTERA Portal. The total number of devices defined in the CTERA Portal. 374 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Viewing Reports The CTERA Portal provides the following reports: Table 80: CTERA Portal Reports This report... Is available for... Folders Folder Groups Devices Plans Plans by Portal Global Plans Add-ons Add-ons by Portal Global Addons Reseller portals, team portals Reseller portals, team portals Reseller portals, team portals, the CTERA Portal system Reseller portals, team portals The CTERA Portal system The CTERA Portal system Reseller portals The CTERA Portal system The CTERA Portal system Storage Portals The CTERA Portal system The CTERA Portal system To view a report for the CTERA Portal system, you must open the report in the Global Administration View. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 375

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Viewing the Folders Report You can view detailed information about all folders, including deleted ones. To view the Folders Report 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Reports. The Main > Reports page appears displaying the Folders Report. If a CTERA Portal administrator already ran the Folders Report, the report is displayed, and the report date appears in the Last run on field. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 2 If the Last run on field displays "Never", or if you would like to update the displayed report, click Run. A new report is generated. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 376 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 81: Folders Report Fields This field... Displays... Name Folder Type Owner Deleted Storage Quota Usage All Snapshots Size Files in Upload Size Current Snapshot Files All Snapshots Files Files in Upload Bad Files Snapshots Number The folder's name. The type of folder (Personal Folder/Project/Backup Folder) The folder's owner. Indicates whether the folder has been deleted (true/false). The percentage of storage quota used. The size of all snapshots of this folder. The size of files that are currently being uploaded to this folder. The number of files in the current snapshot (that is, not including previous versions that are stored for this folder). The total number of files in all snapshots (that is, including previous versions that are stored for this folder). The number of files that are currently being uploaded to this folder. The number of corrupted files in the folder. The number of previous versions currently stored for this folder. Viewing the Folder Groups Report You can view detailed information about all folder groups, including deleted ones. To view the Folder Groups Report 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Reports. The Main > Reports page appears. 2 In the Topic drop-down list, select Folder Groups. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 377

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal The Folder Groups Report is displayed. If a CTERA Portal administrator already ran the Folder Groups Report, the report is displayed, and the report date appears in the Last run on field. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 3 If the Last run on field displays "Never", or if you would like to update the displayed report, click Run. A new report is generated. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 378 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 82: Folder Groups Report Fields This field... Displays... Name Owner Deleted Storage Space Mapfile Overhead Uncompressed Files Size Files in Upload Size Number of Folders Uploaded Blocks In Upload Blocks In Upload Mapfiles Missing Blocks Total Mapfiles Missing Mapfiles Total Files Files in Upload Bad Files The folder group's name. The folder group's owner. Indicates whether the folder group has been deleted (true/false). The amount of storage space consumed by this folder group. The amount of space consumed by the mapfiles for this folder group. The uncompressed size of the files in folders belonging to this folder group. The size of files that are currently being uploaded to folders belonging to this folder group. The number of folders belonging to this folder group. The number of uploaded blocks in folders belonging to this folder group. The number of blocks currently being uploaded to folders belonging to this folder group. The number of mapfiles currently being uploaded to folders belonging to this folder group. The number of missing blocks in folders belonging to this folder group. The total number of mapfiles in folders belonging to this folder group. The number of missing mapfiles in folders belonging to this folder group. The total number of files in folders belonging to this folder group. The number of files that are currently being uploaded to folders belonging to this folder group. The number of corrupted files in folders belonging to this folder group. Viewing the Devices Report You can view detailed information about all devices. To view the Devices Report 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Reports. The Main > Reports page appears. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 379

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal 2 In the Topic drop-down list, select Devices. The Devices Report is displayed. If a CTERA Portal administrator already ran the Devices Report, the report is displayed, and the report date appears in the Last run on field. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 3 If the Last run on field displays "Never", or if you would like to update the displayed report, click Run. A new report is generated. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. Table 83: Devices Report Fields This field... Displays... Device Type Amount Connected Not Connected Total Local Storage Free Local Storage The device type. The number of devices of this type. The number of devices of this type that are currently connected to the CTERA Portal. The number of devices of this type that are currently not connected to the CTERA Portal. The total amount of local storage space reported by devices of this type. The amount of local storage space that is currently reported as unused by devices of this type. 380 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Viewing the Plans, Global Plans, or Plans by Portal Report You can view detailed information about all plans. To view the Plans Report 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Reports. The Main > Reports page appears. 2 In the Topic drop-down list, select Plans. The Plans Report is displayed. If a CTERA Portal administrator already ran the Plans Report, the report is displayed, and the report date appears in the Last run on field. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 3 If the Last run on field displays "Never", or if you would like to update the displayed report, click Run. A new report is generated. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 381

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 84: Plans Report Fields This field... Displays... Portal Name Subscriptions Expired Total Storage Space Server Agent Licenses Workstation Backup Licenses Appliance Licenses Cloud Drive Licenses CloudPlug C200 C400 C800 The name of the portal. This field is relevant to the Plans by Portal report only. The plan's name. The number of subscriptions to the plan. The number of expired subscriptions to the plan. The total amount of cloud storage space quota included in all instances of this plan, in GB. For example, if 10 users are subscribed to a plan with 10GB storage space, this field will display 100GB. The total number of server agent licenses included in all instances of this plan. For example, if 10 users are subscribed to a plan with 5 server agent licenses, this field will display 50. The total number of workstation backup licenses included in all instances of this plan. For example, if 10 users are subscribed to a plan with 10 workstation backups, this field will display 100. The total number of appliance licenses included in all instances of this plan. For example, if 10 users are subscribed to a plan with 10 appliance licenses, this field will display 100. The total number of Cloud Drive licenses included in all instances of this plan. For example, if 10 users are subscribed to a plan with 10 Cloud Drive licenses, this field will display 100. The number of CloudPlug cloud gateways owned by users who are subscribed to the plan. The number of C200 cloud gateways owned by users who are subscribed to the plan. The number of C400 cloud gateways owned by users who are subscribed to the plan. The number of C800 cloud gateways owned by users who are subscribed to the plan. 382 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Cloud Server Agent Cloud Workstation Backup The number of server agents in Cloud Agent mode owned by users who are subscribed to the plan. The number of workstation agents in Cloud Agent mode owned by users who are subscribed to the plan. Viewing the Add-Ons, Global Add-ons, or Add-ons by Portal Report You can view detailed information about all add-ons. To view the Add-Ons Report 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Reports. The Main > Reports page appears. 2 In the Topic drop-down list, select Add-Ons. The Add-Ons Report is displayed. If a CTERA Portal administrator already ran the Add-Ons Report, the report is displayed, and the report date appears in the Last run on field. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 3 If the Last run on field displays "Never", or if you would like to update the displayed report, click Run. A new report is generated. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 383

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 85: Add-Ons Report Fields This field... Displays... Portal Name Amount in use Storage Quota Total Storage Space Server Agent Licenses Workstation Backup Licenses Appliance Licenses Cloud Drive Licenses The name of the portal. This field is relevant to the Add-ons by Portal report only. The add-on's name. The number of add-ons that are currently in use. The amount of storage space included in a single instance of this add-on. The total amount of storage space included in all instances of this add-on. For example, if the storage quota of a single instance of this add-on is 10GB, and the add-on is used 15 times, then the total storage space is 150GB. The total number of server agent licenses included in all instances of this add-on. The total number of workstation backup licenses included in all instances of this add-on. The total number of appliance licenses included in all instances of this add-on. The total number of Cloud Drive licenses included in all instances of this add-on. 384 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Viewing the Storage Report Global administrators can view information about the CTERA Portal storage nodes. To view the Storage Report 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Reports. The Main > Reports page appears displaying the Storage Report. If a CTERA Portal administrator already ran the Storage Report, the report is displayed, and the report date appears in the Last run on field. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 2 If the Last run on field displays "Never", or if you would like to update the displayed report, click Run. A new report is generated. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 385

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 86: Storage Report Fields This field... Displays... Location Type Name Read Only Storage Space Mapfile Overhead Uploaded Blocks Missing Blocks Total Mapfiles Missing Mapfiles In Upload Blocks In Upload Mapfiles The storage node's type. The name of the storage node. Indicates whether the storage node is read only. The amount of storage space available on this storage node. The amount of space consumed by the mapfiles for this server. The number of uploaded blocks in this storage node. The number of missing blocks in this storage node. The total number of mapfiles in this storage node. The number of missing mapfiles in this storage node. The number of blocks currently being uploaded to the storage node. The number of mapfiles currently being uploaded to this storage node. Viewing the Portals Report Global administrators can view information about all virtual portals. To view the Portals Report 1 In the navigation pane, click Main > Reports. The Main > Reports page appears. 2 In the Topic drop-down list, select Portals. The Portals Report is displayed. 386 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 If a CTERA Portal administrator already ran the Portals Report, the report is displayed, and the report date appears in the Last run on field. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. 3 If the Last run on field displays "Never", or if you would like to update the displayed report, click Run. A new report is generated. For information on the fields displayed, see the following table. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 387

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 87: Portals Report Fields This field... Displays... Name Deleted Storage Quota Storage Quota Allocated Storage Quota Usage All Snapshots Size Physical Storage Files in Upload Size Current Snapshot Files All Snapshots Files Files in Upload Bad Files Snapshots Number Server Agents (quota) Server Agents (allocated) Server Agents (used) Workstation Backups (quota) The virtual portal's name. Indicates whether the virtual portal has been deleted (true/false). The storage quota allocated to this virtual portal by the global administrator. If the quota is unlimited, this field will be empty. For a reseller portal, this field displays the sum of all storage quotas allocated to users in the portal. For a team portal, this field displays the sum of all storage quotas currently being used by users in the portal. The amount of storage space used in this virtual portal. The size of all snapshots of this virtual portal. The amount of physical storage used by this virtual portal. The size of files that are currently being uploaded to this virtual portal. The number of files in the current snapshot (that is, not including previous versions that are stored for this virtual portal). The total number of files in all snapshots (that is, including previous versions that are stored for this virtual portal). The number of files that are currently being uploaded to this virtual portal. The number of corrupted files in the virtual portal. The number of previous versions currently stored for this virtual portal. The quota of server agents allocated to this virtual portal by the global administrator. If the quota is unlimited, this field will be empty. For a reseller portal, this field displays the sum of all server agent quotas allocated to users in the portal. For a team portal, this field displays the sum of all server agent quotas currently being used by users in the portal. The number of server agent licenses used in this virtual portal. The quota of workstation backups allocated to this virtual portal by the global administrator. If the quota is unlimited, this field will be empty. 388 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Workstation Backups (allocated) For a reseller portal, this field displays the sum of all workstation backup quotas allocated to users in the portal. For a team portal, this field displays the sum of all workstation backup quotas currently being used by users in the portal. Workstation Backups (used) The number of workstation backup licenses used in this virtual portal. Appliances (used) Cloud Drives (quota) Cloud Drives (allocated) Cloud Drives (used) Connected Devices Total Users The total number of cloud gateways defined in the virtual portal. The quota of cloud drives allocated to this virtual portal by the global administrator. If the quota is unlimited, this field will be empty. For a reseller portal, this field displays the sum of all cloud drive quotas allocated to users in the portal. For a team portal, this field displays the sum of all cloud drive quotas currently being used by users in the portal. The number of cloud drive licenses used in this virtual portal. The number of devices that are currently connected to the virtual portal. The total number of users defined in the virtual portal. Exporting Reports to Excel You can export reports to a CSV file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel. To export a report 1 View the desired report. See Viewing Reports (on page 375). 2 Click Export to Excel. The report is exported to a CSV file. Configuring Logging You can configure CTERA Portal Event Log settings, as well as Syslog settings. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 389

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Configuring Event Log Settings Global administrators can configure Event Log settings for all virtual portals. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To configure Event Log settings 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Log Settings. The Logs & Alerts > Log Settings page appears. 2 In the Keep logs for field, type the number of days that the CTERA Portal should store logs. The default value is 30 days. 3 In the Log Level drop-down list, select the minimum log level to display in the CTERA Portal. For example, if you select Critical, then only Alert, Critical, and Emergency logs will appear in the CTERA Portal. The default value is Info. 4 In the Cloud Drive Logging field, select one of the following: None. Disables logging of reads and writes to the cloud drive. Reads and Writes. Enables logging of reads and writes to the cloud drive, for auditing purposes. Writes Only. Enables logging of only writes to the cloud drive. 5 Click Save. 390 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Configuring Syslog Logging If desired, you can configure the CTERA Portal to send logs to a Syslog server located on your network or on the Internet. This task must be performed in the Global Administration View. Tip You can obtain free Syslog servers online, such as Kiwi Syslog Daemon (http://www.kiwisyslog.com/). To configure Syslog logging 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Syslog. The Logs & Alerts > Syslog page appears. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 391

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 88: Syslog Fields In this field... Do this... Use Syslog Minimum Event Severity Server Address Syslog Port Select this option to enable Syslog logging. You must complete the rest of the fields. Select the minimum log level to send to the Syslog server. For example, if you select Critical, then only Alert, Critical, and Emergency logs will be sent to the Syslog server. The default value is Info. Type the Syslog server IP address. Type the Syslog server's port number. The default value is 514. Viewing Logs The CTERA Portal Log Viewer includes the following log categories: Table 89: Log Categories This log category... Displays... And is available for... System Local Backup Cloud Backup Cloud Sync Access Audit All events that do not belong in other log categories. Events related to synchronization operations. Events related to backup or restore operations. Events related to cloud drive synchronization operations Events related to user access to the CTERA Portal. Changes to the CTERA Portal configuration. Reseller portals, team portals, the CTERA Portal system Reseller portals, team portals Reseller portals, team portals Reseller portals, team portals Reseller portals, team portals, the CTERA Portal system Reseller portals, team portals, the CTERA Portal system Agents Events related to CTERA Agents. Reseller portals, team portals Viewing logs for the CTERA Portal system is available in the Global Administration View. 392 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Viewing System Logs To view System logs In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Event Log. The Logs & Alerts > Event Log page appears displaying the System logs. Tip If the Log Viewer is already open and a different log category is displayed, in the Select Topic drop-down list, select System. The following information is displayed: Table 90: System Log Fields This field... Displays... Type An icon indicating the log level. See Log Levels (page 394). Origin Type Origin Date Portal User Device User Details The type of entity sent the event log (a virtual portal or a device). The entity that sent the event log. To edit or view details about the entity, click the entity name. The date and time at which the event occurred. The portal administrator or user who triggered the event. To edit the administrator or user, click their user name. For further details, see Managing Administrators (on page 135). The user who triggered the event on the device. This field is relevant only for events where the origin is a device. A description of the event. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 393

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 91: Log Levels Icon Log Level Error Warning Info Debug Viewing Local Backup Logs To view Local Backup logs 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Event Log. The Logs & Alerts > Event Log page appears displaying the System logs. 2 In the Select Topic drop-down list, select Local Backup. The Local Backup logs appear. For information on the displayed fields, see the following tables. 3 To view files for which errors occurred during a synchronization operation, click on the desired operation in the upper pane. Information about files for which errors occurred appears in the lower pane. 394 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 92: Local Backup Log Upper Pane Fields This field... Displays... Type Origin Type Origin Start Time Name Mode Type Level Duration Result An icon indicating the log level. See Log Levels. The type of entity sent the event log (a virtual portal or a device). The entity that sent the event log. To edit or view details about the entity, click the entity name. The date and time at which the synchronization operation started. The name of the sync rule. The operation mode, Backup or Restore. The type of synchronization, manual or scheduled. The synchronization level, Files or Sync. The amount of time the synchronization operation took. The result of the synchronization operation. Table 93: Local Backup Log Lower Pane Fields This field... Displays... Type An icon indicating that an error occurred during synchronization ( ). File Name Path Result The name of the file for which an error occurred. The path to the file. The result of the synchronization operation. Viewing Cloud Backup Logs To view Cloud Backup logs 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Event Log. The Logs & Alerts > Event Log page appears displaying the System logs. 2 In the Select Topic drop-down list, select Cloud Backup. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 395

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal The Cloud Backup logs appear. For information on the displayed fields, see the following table. 3 To view additional logging information for a backup operation, click on the desired operation in the upper pane. Information about files included in the backup operation appears in the lower pane. 396 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 94: Cloud Backup Log Upper Pane Fields This field... Displays... Type An icon indicating the log level. See Log Levels (page 394). Origin Type Origin Start Time Mode Type Duration Result Files Size Transferred Files Transferred Size Changed Files Changed Size More Info The type of entity sent the event log (a virtual portal or a device). The entity that sent the event log. To edit or view details about the entity, click the entity name. The date and time at which the backup operation started. The operation mode, Backup or Restore. The type of backup, manual or scheduled. The amount of time the backup operation took. The result of the backup operation. The number of files to be backed up. The total size of the files to be backed up. The number of files transferred to cloud storage during the backup operation. The size of the files transferred to cloud storage during the backup operation. The number of files that changed since the last backup operation. The total size of the files that changed since the last backup operation. Additional information about the event. Table 95: Cloud Backup Log Lower Pane Fields This field... Displays... Type An icon indicating whether backup was successful ( ) or not ( ). Operation File Name Path Duration Size Transferred Size Dedup Ratio The operation performed (create, delete, modify, or rename). The name of the backed up file. The path to the backed up file. The amount of time backup took for the file. The size of the file. The size of the file transferred to cloud storage. The de-duplication ratio for the file. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 397

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Result The result of the backup operation. Viewing Cloud Sync Logs To view Cloud Sync logs 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Event Log. The Logs & Alerts > Event Log page appears displaying the System logs. 2 In the Select Topic drop-down list, select Cloud Sync. The Cloud Sync logs appear. For information on the displayed fields, see the following table. 398 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 96: Cloud Sync Log Fields This field... Displays... Type Origin Type Origin Operation Direction File Name Folder Name Path Start Time Duration Size Transferred Size Dedup Ratio Result An icon indicating the log level. See Log Levels. The type of entity sent the event log (a virtual portal or a device). The entity that sent the event log. To edit or view details about the entity, click the entity name. The synchronization operation performed: New. A new file or directory was created. Updated. A file or directory was updated. The synchronization operation's direction: In. From the cloud drive to the local drive. Out. From the local drive to the cloud drive. The name of the file transferred during the synchronization operation. The name of a folder containing the file transferred during the synchronization operation. The path to the file transferred during the synchronization operation. The date and time at which the synchronization operation started. The amount of time the synchronization operation took. The size of the synchronized file. The actual amount of data transferred. The de-duplication ratio for the file transferred during the synchronization operation. The result of the synchronization operation. Viewing Access Logs To view Access logs 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Event Log. The Logs & Alerts > Event Log page appears displaying the System logs. 2 In the Select Topic drop-down list, select Access. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 399

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal The Access logs appear. The following information is displayed: 400 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 97: Access Log Fields This field... Displays... Type An icon indicating the log level. See Log Levels (page 394). Action The action type (login, logout, rename...) Origin Type Origin Date Portal User Device User Protocol Details Client IP Target More Info The type of entity sent the event log (a virtual portal or a device). The entity that sent the event log. To edit or view details about the entity, click the entity name. The date and time at which the event occurred. The portal administrator or user who triggered the event. To edit the administrator or user, click their user name. For further details, see Managing Administrators (on page 135). The user who triggered the event on the device. This field is relevant only for events where the origin is a device. The protocol used when triggering the event: GUI CIFS (Windows File Sharing) AFP FTP NFS RSync CTERA Agent WebDAV A description of the event. The IP address from which the user triggered the event. The entity on which the action was performed. Additional information about the event. Viewing Audit Logs To view Audit logs 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Event Log. The Logs & Alerts > Event Log page appears displaying the System logs. 2 In the Select Topic drop-down list, select Audit. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 401

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal The Audit logs appear. The following information is displayed: Table 98: Audit Log Fields This field... Displays... Action The action type. See Action Types (page 403). Origin Type Origin Date Portal User Device User Type Target More Info The type of entity sent the event log (a virtual portal or a device). The entity that sent the event log. To edit or view details about the entity, click the entity name. The date and time at which the event occurred. The portal administrator or user who triggered the event. To edit the administrator or user, click their user name. For further details, see Managing Administrators (on page 135). The user who triggered the event on the device. This field is relevant only for events where the origin is a device. The type of setting that was affected by the action. For example, if CTERA Portal administrator JohnS was deleted, this column displays "PortalAdmin". The object that was affected by the action. For example, if user JohnS was deleted, this column displays "JohnS". Additional information about the event. 402 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 99: Action Types Icon Label Description Added Deleted Modified Formatted Disabled Enabled An object was added to the CTERA Portal. An object was deleted from the CTERA Portal. An object was modified. A disk was formatted. A setting was disabled. A setting was enabled. Viewing Agent Logs To view Agents logs 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Event Log. The Logs & Alerts > Event Log page appears displaying the System logs. 2 In the Select Topic drop-down list, select Agents. The Agents logs appear. The following information is displayed: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 403

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 100: CTERA Agents Log Fields This field... Displays... Type An icon indicating the log level. See Log Levels (page 394). Origin Type Origin The type of entity sent the event log (a virtual portal or a device). The entity that sent the event log. To edit or view details about the entity, click the entity name. Date Source Details More Info The date and time at which the event occurred. The name of the CTERA Agent-installed computer that triggered the event. A description of the event. Additional information about the event. Filtering Logs You can filter the logs in a given log category according to one or more of the following: Severity. Only those logs with a certain minimum log level will be displayed. This type of filtering is available for all log categories. Date. Only those logs on, before, or after a certain date will be displayed. This type of filtering is available only for System, Access, and Audit log categories. Origin Type. Only those logs sent by a certain type of entity (device or virtual portal) will be displayed. This type of filtering is available for all log categories. Origin. Only those logs sent by a specific entity will be displayed. This type of filtering is available for all log categories. User. Only those logs triggered by a specific user will be displayed. This type of filtering is available only for System logs. To filter logs 1 View the desired log category. See Viewing Logs. 2 To filter according to severity, in the Minimum Severity drop-down list, select the minimum log level to display in this category. For example, if you select Warning, then only Warning and Error logs will be displayed. 3 To filter according to date: a Mouse-over the Date column's heading, then click on the arrow that appears. A drop-down list appears. 404 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 b Mouse-over Filters, then mouse-over the desired date filter type. A calendar appears. c Click the desired date. 4 To filter according to origin type: a Mouse-over the Origin Type column's heading, then click on the arrow that appears. A drop-down list appears. b Mouse-over Filters. A list of origin types appears. c Click the desired origin type. 5 To filter according to origin: a Mouse-over the Origin column's heading, then click on the arrow that appears. A drop-down list appears. b Mouse-over Filters. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 405

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal A field appears. c In the field, type the desired origin. 6 To filter according to user: a Mouse-over the User column's heading, then click on the arrow that appears. A drop-down list appears. b Mouse-over Filters. A field appears. c In the field, type the desired name of the desired user's user account. 7 To remove a severity filter, set the Minimum Severity to Info. 8 To remove any other filter: a Mouse-over the relevant column's heading, then click on the arrow that appears. A drop-down list appears. b Clear the Filters check box. The filter is removed. Exporting Logs to Excel You can export logs to a CSV file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel. To export logs 1 View the desired log category. See Viewing Logs. 2 Click Export to Excel. 406 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 The logs in the current log category are exported to a CSV file. Clearing Logs Global administrators can clear the logs of all virtual portals. This task can be performed in the Global Administration View only. To clear all logs 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Log Settings. The Logs & Alerts > Log Settings page appears. 2 Click Clean Now. Logs are cleared in all virtual portals. Using CTERA Portal Email Notifications You can configure the CTERA Portal to automatically send email notifications to end users and administrators upon certain events. Tip In order to use notifications, the Email Sender Name must be configured in the Settings > General page. See Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 407

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Configuring Email Notifications To configure CTERA Portal email notifications 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Email Notifications. The Settings > Email Notifications page appears. 2 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 3 Click Save. 408 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Table 101: CTERA Portal Email Notification Fields In this fields... Do this... Backup completed successfully Backup completed with errors and warnings No successful backup in No successful sync in User is over storage quota User is over agents quota Quota is Add-on is about to expire in Trial is about to expire in Select this option to send a notification to end users when cloud backup has completed successfully. Select this option to send a notification to end users when cloud backup has completed with errors and warnings. Select this option to send a notification to end users when no successful backup has occurred in a certain time period, then enter the number of days or hours in the field provided and select days or hours in the dropdown box. Select this option to send a notification to end users when no successful sync has occurred in a certain time period, then enter the number of days or hours in the field provided and select days or hours in the dropdown box. Select this option to send a notification to end users when their cloud storage space is full. Select this option to send a notification to end users when they have exceeded the licensed number of CTERA Agents. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. Select this option to send a notification to end users when the cloud storage space is a certain percentage full, then type the desired percentage in the field provided. The default value is 90% Select this option to send a notification to end users when an add-on to which they are subscribed will expire in a certain number of days, then type the desired number of days in the field provided. The default value is 7 days. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. Select this option to send a notification to end users when their trial subscription will expire in a certain number of days, then type the desired number of days in the field provided. The default value is 7 days. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 409

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Device not connected Account creation notification Password reset confirmation Account registration confirmation Email change confirmation Guest invitation Protected invitation verification (Email) Protected invitation verification (SMS) Send monthly report on day Select this option to send a notification to end users when their device has not connected to the CTERA Portal for a certain number of days, then type the desired number of days in the field provided. The default value is 3 days. Select this option to send a notification to end users when an account has been created for them by an administrator, inviting them to use the portal. The email message contains the portal address, as well as the username and password. Select this option to send a notification to end users when a request is made to reset their password. This notification is mandatory. It is always enabled and cannot be disabled. Select this option to send a notification to end users after registering with the CTERA Portal, and before activating their account. This notification is mandatory. It is always enabled and cannot be disabled. This field is relevant for reseller portals only. Select this option to send a notification to end users when a request is made to change their email address. This notification is mandatory. It is always enabled and cannot be disabled. Select this option to send a guest invitation email when a guest is invited to access a file or folder. Select this option to send a verification code by email to an invitation recipient. Select this option to send a verification code by text message to an invitation recipient. Select this option to send a monthly report to end users, which includes the following information: Account information Storage statistics Usage report Details of all the user's devices Information on the status of the user's cloud backups Then use the arrows to specify the date on which reports should be sent each month. The default value is 1. 410 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Storage node is Storage node is full Storage node is offline Storage pool is Pool is full Storage pool has failed Storage pool is degraded No snapshots taken in the past Certificate will expire in Catalog database is down Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the storage node space is a certain percentage full, then type the desired percentage in the field provided. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the storage node is full. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the storage node is offline. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the storage pool is a certain percentage full, then type the desired percentage in the field provided. The default value is 85%. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the storage pool is full. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the storage pool has failed. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the storage pool is degraded. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when no snapshots have been taken in a certain number of hours or days, then type the number of hours or days in the field provided and select hours or days from the dropdown box. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the portal certificate will expire in a certain number of days, then type the number of days in the field provided. This field appears only in the global administration view. Select this option to send a notification to portal administrators when the catalog database is down. This field appears only in the global administration view. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 411

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Customizing Email Notification Templates By default, each virtual portal inherits its email notification templates from the global settings. If desired, you can customize the email notifications listed in Configuring Email Notifications (on page 408), as well as the following email notifications: Table 102: CTERA Portal Email Notification Templates Notification Description Vouchers issued Registration Confirmation Invoice Notification A notification sent to end users when a voucher has been issued to them. A notification sent to end users after registering with the CTERA Portal, but before activating their account. A notification sent to end users with an invoice PDF attached. This template allows customizing both the email message and the PDF. User is near quota limitation header footer Device activated A notification sent to end users when the amount of cloud backup storage space used reaches or exceeds the percentage specified in the Settings > Email Notifications page page's Quota is field. The HTML header that appears at the top of all notifications. The HTML footer that appears at the bottom of all notifications. A notification sent to end users when their device has been activated. You customize email notifications by modifying their templates. The email notifications are in HTML format. This procedure is relevant for reseller portals only. To customize CTERA Portal email notification templates 1 Do one of the following: To customize configurable notifications only: 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Email Notifications. The Settings > Email Notifications page appears. 2 Next to the desired notification, click Customize. To customize non-configurable notifications, or both configurable notifications and non-configurable notifications: 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Email Templates. 412 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 The Settings > Email Templates page appears. 2 Select the desired email template's row and then click Edit. The Notification Template Editor opens displaying the Message tab. If the notification includes a PDF attachment, the Notification Template Editor will include a PDF tab, as well. 2 Select the Customize Notification Template check box. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 413

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal 3 In the Subject field, type the text that should appear in the notification email's Subject line. 4 In the Message box, modify the template as desired. 5 To preview your changes, click Preview. 6 To edit a PDF attachment, do the following: a Click the PDF File tab. The PDF File tab appears. b In the PDF box, modify the template as desired. c To preview your changes, click Preview. The PDF is downloaded to your computer. 7 To undo your unsaved changes, click Revert. 8 Click Save. 414 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Reverting to Email Notification Default Settings If you customized an email template, you can revert the template to its default settings. To revert to an email notification's default settings 1 Do one of the following: To revert configurable notifications only: 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Email Notifications. The Settings > Email Notifications page appears. 2 Next to the desired notification, click Customize. To revert non-configurable notifications, or both configurable notifications and non-configurable notifications: 1 In the navigation pane, click Settings > Email Templates. The Settings > Email Templates page appears. 2 Select the desired email template's row and then click Edit. The Notification Template Editor opens displaying the desired template. 2 Clear the Customize Notification Template check box. 3 Click Save. Using Email Alerts You can configure the CTERA Portal to automatically send email alerts to end users and administrators upon certain CTERA Portal log messages. Tip In order to use notifications, the Email Sender Name must be configured in the Settings > General page. See Overriding Global Portal Settings (see "Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings" on page 75). CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 415

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Adding and Editing Email Alerts To add or edit an email alert 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Email Alerts. The Logs & Alerts > Email Alerts page appears. 2 Do one of the following: To add a new email alert, click New. To edit an existing email alert, select the email alert's row and click Edit. The Alert Rule Wizard opens displaying the Event Filter dialog box. 3 Complete the fields using the information in the following table. 4 Click Next. 416 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 The Alert Name dialog box appears. 5 In the Alert Name field, type a name for the email alert. 6 In the Description field, type a description of the email alert. 7 Click Finish. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 417

20 Monitoring the CTERA Portal Table 103: Alert Rule Event Filter Fields In this field... Do this... Log Topic Log Name Origin Type Minimum Severity Message Contains Select the category of logs that should trigger the email alert. For an explanation of the log categories, see Viewing Logs. Alternatively, select Any to specify that any log category can trigger the email alert. Select the name of the log that should trigger the email alert. Alternatively, select Any to specify that any log can trigger the email alert. Select the entity from which a log must originate in order to trigger the email alert. Alternatively, select Any to specify that any log can originate from any entity in order to trigger the email alert. Select the minimum severity a log must have in order to trigger the email alert. For an explanation of the log severities, see Log Levels (page 394). Type the text that the log message must contain in order to trigger the email alert. Viewing Email Alerts To view all email alerts In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Email Alerts. The Logs & Alerts > Email Alerts page appears, displaying all email alerts. The table includes the following columns. Table 104: Email Alert Fields This field... Displays... Name Description The email alert's name. To edit the email alert, click the alert's name. For further details, see Adding and Editing Email Alerts (on page 416). A description of the email alert. 418 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Monitoring the CTERA Portal 20 Deleting Email Alerts To delete an email alert 1 In the navigation pane, click Logs & Alerts > Email Alerts. The Logs & Alerts > Email Alerts page appears, displaying all email alerts. 2 Select the desired email alert's row. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears. 4 Click Yes. The email alert is deleted. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 419

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures This chapter is intended for CTERA Portal administrators. It describes how to replace CTERA cloud gateways and/or their disks, when a customer reports the following situations: The cloud gateway's hard disks are not working. See Recovering from Hard Drive Failures (on page 422). The cloud gateway is not functioning properly. See Recovering from Cloud Gateway Failures (on page 426). The cloud gateway is a total loss. See Recovering from Total Loss (see "Recovering from Total Loss of an Cloud Gateway" on page 432). In This Chapter Recovering from Hard Drive Failures ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 422 Recovering from Cloud Gateway Failures ------------------------------------------------------------------ 426 Recovering from Total Loss of a Cloud Gateway ---------------------------------------------------------- 432 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 421

Recovering from Hard Drive Failures This chapter explains how to recover from a hard drive failure, while the cloud gateway is functioning properly. Overview The procedure involves verifying the array's status. Then, if the array is degraded, it is necessary to replace the failed hard drives. If the array has failed, it is necessary to replace the failed hard drives, add the new hard drives to the array, recreate the lost volumes, and restore their contents from cloud backup. To recover from a hard drive failure 1 Log in to the cloud gateway's Web interface. For instructions, refer to the cloud gateway's user guide. 2 In the Main > Dashboard page, view information on the RAID array and the physical disk's status. 3 If the RAID array's status is "Degraded", and the status of a few disks is "Failed", replace those disks. The array will rebuild itself. 4 If RAID array's status is "Failed", the data on it was lost. To recover the data, do the following: a Remove the disks marked as "Failed" from the cloud gateway. b Insert new disks. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 422

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 Tip If the disks are not new, you can delete all data by formatting them. To do so, click on the disk once it appears in the Main > Dashboard page, and then click Format. c Edit the failed RAID array, by doing the following: 1 In the Storage > Arrays page, click on the name of the failed array. 2 Add the new drives to the failed array. 3 Complete the Array Editor Wizard. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 423

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures d In the Share > Shares page, for each share with the status "Offline", write down the volume name (listed in the Volume column). e Create volumes with the same names as those you wrote down in the previous step, by doing the following for each such volume: 1 In the Storage > Volumes page, click New. 2 In the Logical Volume Wizard, select the new array you created in the Storage Device field. 3 Complete the Logical Volume Wizard. 424 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 f Restore data from cloud backup, by doing the following: 1 In the Cloud Backup > Control Panel page, click Restore. 2 In the tree pane, select all of the shares that were lost. 3 Complete the Restore Files Wizard. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 425

Recovering from Cloud Gateway Failures This chapter explains how to replace an cloud gateway, when there has been a hardware failure but the hard drives are undamaged, by replacing the cloud gateway with a new one of the same model while keeping the old hard drives. Overview The procedure involves installing the new cloud gateway, moving the old hard drives into the new cloud gateway, connecting the new cloud gateway to cloud services, recovering the device configuration from cloud backup, and moving the cloud backup folder from the old cloud gateway to the new one. Tip In C800, the power supplies are user swappable. Before performing this procedure, try swapping the power supplies. To recover from a cloud gateway failure 1 Remove the old cloud gateway's disks. 2 Plug in the new cloud gateway. 3 Insert the disks that were removed from the faulty cloud gateway into the new cloud gateway. The new cloud gateway will automatically recognize the volumes on the disks. 4 In the CTERA Portal, download the old cloud gateway's configuration file, by doing the following: a In the Folders > Backup Folders page, click on the folder associated with the old cloud gateway. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 426

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 b In the Folder Manager, click View files to open the File Manager. c Navigate to the cloud gateway's configuration file, db.xml, which is located in the path /Device Configuration. d Select the configuration file, click Actions, and then click Download. 5 In the new cloud gateway's Web interface, import the downloaded cloud gateway configuration file, by doing the following: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 427

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures a In the System > Configuration Tools page, click Import. b Select the downloaded db.xml file and complete the Configuration Import Wizard. 6 In the new cloud gateway's Web interface, connect to the CTERA Portal, by doing the following: 428 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 a In the Cloud Services > Status page, click Connect to Services. b Complete the Connect to Services Wizard. 7 In the CTERA Portal, assign the old device's backup folder to the new cloud gateway, and then delete the old cloud gateway, by doing the following: a In the Main > Devices page, click on the new device's name. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 429

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures b In the Device Manager's Settings tab, select the old device's backup folder in the Backup Folder drop-down list. c When done, save your changes. In the Main > Devices page, the new device is listed as using the old device's backup folder. d (Optional) If you want to delete the old device, do the following: 1 Select the old device's row, then click Delete Device. 2 Click Delete device only. 8 If the backup folder is passphrase-protected, the Cloud Backup > Control Panel page will indicate that you need to run the backup wizard again. In this case, do the following: 430 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 a Click Run the Backup Setup Wizard. b In the Backup Wizard, enter the passphrase. c Complete the Backup Wizard. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 431

Recovering from Total Loss of a Cloud Gateway This chapter explains how to replace an cloud gateway, which together with its hard drives is a total loss, due to a disaster such as theft, fire, or flood. Overview The procedure involves installing the new cloud gateways, recreating the lost RAID arrays and volumes, moving the cloud backup folder from the old cloud gateway to the new one, and recovering the device configuration and data from cloud backup. To recover from total loss 1 In the CTERA Portal, download the old cloud gateway's configuration file, by doing the following: a In the Folders > Backup Folders page, click on the folder associated with the old cloud gateway. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 432

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 b In the Folder Manager, click View Files to open the File Manager. c Navigate to the cloud gateway's configuration file, db.xml, which is located in the path /Device Configuration. d Select the configuration file, click Actions, and then click Download. 2 Install the new cloud gateway, skipping the setup wizard. 3 In the new cloud gateway's Web interface, import the downloaded cloud gateway configuration file, by doing the following: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 433

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures a In the System > Configuration Tools page, click Import. b Select the downloaded db.xml file and complete the Configuration Import Wizard. 4 In the new cloud gateway's Web interface, create a new RAID array, by doing the following: 434 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 a In the Storage > Arrays page, click New. b Complete the Array Editor Wizard. 5 In the new cloud gateway's Share > Shares page, for each share with the status "Offline", write down the volume name (listed in the Volume column). 6 Create volumes with the same names as those you wrote down in the previous step, by doing the following for each such volume: CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 435

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures a In the Storage > Volumes page, click New. b In the Logical Volume Wizard, select the new array you created in the Storage Device field. c Complete the Logical Volume Wizard. 7 In the new cloud gateway's Web interface, connect to the CTERA Portal, by doing the following: 436 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 a In the Cloud Services > Status page, click Connect to Services. b Complete the Connect to Services Wizard. 8 In the CTERA Portal, assign the old device's backup folder to the new cloud gateway, and then delete the old cloud gateway, by doing the following: a In the Main > Devices page, click on the new device's name. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 437

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures b In the Device Manager's Settings tab, select the old device's backup folder in the Backup Folder drop-down list. c When done, save your changes. In the Main > Devices page, the new device is listed as using the old device's backup folder. d (Optional) If you want to delete the old device, do the following: 1 Select the old device's row, then click Delete Device. 2 Click Delete device only. 9 If the backup folder is passphrase-protected, the Cloud Backup > Control Panel page will indicate that you need to run the backup wizard again. In this case, do the following: 438 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 21 a Click Run the Backup Setup Wizard. b In the Backup Wizard, enter the passphrase. c Complete the Backup Wizard. 10 In the new cloud gateway's Web interface, restore data from cloud backup, by doing the following: a In the Cloud Backup > Control Panel page, click Restore Files. b In the tree pane, select all of the shares that were lost. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 439

21 Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures c Complete the Restore Files Wizard. 440 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

22 Legal Information This chapter contains important legal information about your CTERA products. In This Chapter CTERA End User License Agreement ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 441 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 445 Apache License ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 448 PostgreSQL Database Management System (formerly known as Postgres, then as Postgres95)450 CTERA End User License Agreement This End User License Agreement (the "Agreement") by and between the individual installing and/or using the Software (as such term is defined below) and any legal entity on whose behalf such individual is acting (collectively, "You" or "you") and CTERA Networks Ltd. ("CTERA"), governs Your use of the object code format of (i) any software or firmware program embedded or included in any hardware product supplied by CTERA or its authorized partners, and (ii) any software program supplied by CTERA or its authorized partners; and (iii) all accompanying manuals and other documentation, and all enhancements, upgrades, and extensions thereto that may be provided by CTERA or its authorized partners to You from time to time, unless otherwise indicated by CTERA (the "Software"). PLEASE NOTE: BY DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, COPYING, ACCESSING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE, OR BY CHOOSING THE "I ACCEPT" OPTION LOCATED ON OR ADJACENT TO THE SCREEN WHERE THIS AGREEMENT MAY BE DISPLAYED, YOU INDICATE YOUR ACKNOWLEDGMENT THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY AND COMPLY WITH ITS TERMS. YOUR WRITTEN APPROVAL IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE VALIDITY OR ENFORCEABILITY OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU ARE ACCEPTING THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF ANOTHER PERSON OR A COMPANY OR OTHER LEGAL ENTITY, YOU REPRESENT AND WARRANT THAT YOU HAVE FULL AUTHORITY TO BIND THAT PERSON, COMPANY, OR LEGAL ENTITY TO THESE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY, ACCESS, OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL PACKAGING, MEDIA, DOCUMENTATION, AND PROOF OF PAYMENT, TO THE PARTY FROM WHOM IT WAS OBTAINED FOR A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID, PROVIDED THAT THE RETURN IS MADE WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS OF THE DATE OF PURCHASE. 1. License to Use Software 1.1 Subject to proper payment to CTERA and Your compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement, CTERA hereby grants You a non-exclusive, non-sublicensable, non-transferable license to install and use the Software, solely for Your internal business needs, in accordance with the terms set forth in this Agreement and subject to any further restrictions in CTERA documentation, and solely on the CTERA appliance on which CTERA installed the Software, or, for stand-alone Software, solely on a single computer running a validly licensed copy of the operating system for which the Software was designed. You agree that, except for the limited, specific license rights granted in this section 1, You receive no license rights to the Software. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 441

22 Legal Information 1.2 Unless otherwise authorized in writing by CTERA and to the extent otherwise provided in the applicable license for Free Programs (as defined below), You undertake not to (and not to allow third parties to) (1) sublicense, lease, rent, loan, or otherwise transfer the Software to any third party, (2) decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract or otherwise reverse engineer or attempt to reconstruct or discover any source code of, or any underlying ideas in, the Software ("Reverse Engineering"),, (3) modify, enhance, supplement, adapt, or prepare derivative works from the Software, (4) allow others to use the Software and use the Software for the benefit of third parties, (5) develop any other product containing any of the concepts and ideas contained in the Software, (6) remove, obscure, or alter CTERA's or any third party's trademarks or copyright or other proprietary rights notices affixed to or contained within or accessed in conjunction with or through the Software, and (7) make unauthorized copies of the Software (except as necessary for backup purposes). If, notwithstanding the prohibition set forth in subsection (2) above, applicable law permits Reverse Engineering, You will, before commencing or permitting any Reverse Engineering (A) inform CTERA of the planned Reverse Engineering, (B) conduct or allow such Reverse Engineering only to achieve interoperability between the Software and other computer programs, (C) request from CTERA the information necessary to achieve such interoperability, (D) provide CTERA ample opportunity to supply the information necessary to achieve interoperability. 1.3 CTERA has no obligation to provide support, maintenance, upgrades, modifications, or new releases of the Software under this Agreement. You may contact CTERA or its authorized resellers to determine the availability of such support, maintenance, distribution or upgrade of the Software, and the fees, terms and conditions applicable thereto. 2. Intellectual Property 2.1 You acknowledge that CTERA or other third parties own all right, title and interest, including all intellectual property rights, in and to the Software, portions thereof, or software or content provided through or in conjunction with the Software. Except for the license granted in accordance with Section 1 of this Agreement, all rights in and to the Software are reserved, no licenses, implied or otherwise, are granted by CTERA, You are not authorized to use CTERA s trademarks, service marks, or trade dress, and You agree not to display or use them in any manner. 2.2 If You have comments on the Software or ideas on how to improve it, please contact us. By doing so, You also grant CTERA a perpetual, royalty-free, irrevocable, transferable license, with right of sublicense, to use and incorporate Your ideas or comments into the Software (or third party software, content, or services), and to otherwise exploit Your ideas and comments, in each case without payment of any compensation. 3. GPL License The Software makes use of free and open source programs (the "Free Programs"), licensed under the following license agreements: GNU General Public License (GPL), version 2 or later: www.gnu.org/ licenses/gpl.html, GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), version 2.1 or later: www.gnu.org/ licenses/lgpl.html, Apache License, Version 2.0 or later: www.apache.org/licenses/license-2.0. It is Your responsibility to review and adhere to all licenses to Free Programs. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, You may redistribute the Free Programs and/or modify them under the terms of the corresponding license agreement. The Free Programs are distributed in the hope that they will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. To obtain the source code for the Free Programs subject to the terms of the corresponding license agreement, please send a request by mail to: Open Source Requests, CTERA Networks Ltd, Imber 24, Petach Tikva, Israel. 4. Third Party Software Software licensed to CTERA by third parties for direct or indirect distribution to end users ( Third Party Software ) may be embedded in the Software and sublicensed directly to You. Third Party Software is provided to You subject to separate licenses directly between You and the third party licensor, available from CTERA at Your request. You will have no recourse against CTERA unless CTERA is the stated licensor and then only to the extent provided in such license. You will be responsible to do whatever is necessary or required by the third party licensor for the licenses and related terms to take effect (e.g. online registration). You are also accepting the terms and conditions of the licenses applicable to any Third Party Software (including any open source software) included with the Software. 5. Acceptable Use and Conduct You shall use the Software in compliance with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, shall not violate or attempt to violate CTERA s system or network security, and shall not misuse the Software in any way. You shall be responsible for Your conduct while using the Software. 442 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Legal Information 22 6. Term and Termination CTERA shall have the right to terminate this Agreement at any time due to Your breach of this Agreement by providing You with a written notice. Upon CTERA's termination of this Agreement, You shall not be entitled to any compensation, reimbursement or damages of any kind. You shall have the right to terminate this Agreement at any time due to CTERA s breach of this Agreement by providing CTERA with a written notice. You agree that, upon termination or expiration of this Agreement for any reason, You will cease using the Software and either destroy all copies of the Software and CTERA documentation or return them to CTERA. The provisions of this Agreement, other than the license granted in section 1 ("License to User Software"), shall survive termination. 7. Disclaimer of Warranties THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS. CTERA AND CTERA'S LICENSORS AND RESELLERS MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, CTERA AND ITS LICENSORS AND RESELLERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND ANY WARRANTIES ARISING OUT OF ANY COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE. CTERA AND ITS LICENSORS AND RESELLERS DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL FUNCTION AS DESCRIBED, WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR FREE OF HARMFUL COMPONENTS, OR THAT THE DATA YOU STORE BY USING THE SOFTWARE WILL BE SECURE OR NOT OTHERWISE LOST OR DAMAGED. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION OBTAINED BY YOU FROM CTERA OR FROM ANY THIRD PARTY OR THROUGH THE SOFTWARE SHALL CREATE ANY WARRANTY NOT EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU UNDERSTAND AND AGREE THAT YOU USE THE SOFTWARE, AND ALL THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE SOFTWARE, AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND THAT YOU WILL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES TO YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE AND SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AND SERVICES. SOME STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE AND JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. THIS SECTION CONSTITUTES A CONTRACT FOR THE BENEFIT OF EACH OF CTERA'S LICENSORS, RESELLERS AND DISTRIBUTORS. 8. Limitation of Liability NEITHER CTERA NOR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS AND RESELLERS SHALL BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (EVEN IF CTERA ITS LICENSORS OR RESELLERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES) IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY SUCH DAMAGES RESULTING FROM: (i) THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE; (ii) THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS AND SERVICES; OR (iii) UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO OR ALTERATION OF YOUR CONTENT. IN ANY CASE AND WITHOUT DEROGATING FROM THE ABOVE, TO THE EXTENT THAT THE AFOREMENTIONED LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT BE ENFORCEABLE, CTERA'S AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AND ANY OTHER AGREEMENT BETWEEN CTERA AND YOU SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE LOWER OF (I) THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU TO CTERA FOR THE SOFTWARE WHICH IS THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CLAIM, OR (II) US$1,000,000. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY INHERENTLY DANGEROUS APPLICATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. ACCORDINGLY, SOME OR ALL OF THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU, AND YOU MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL RIGHTS. THIS SECTION CONSTITUTES A CONTRACT FOR THE BENEFIT OF EACH OF CTERA'S LICENSORS, RESELLERS AND DISTRIBUTORS. 9. Indemnification by You 9.1 You shall indemnify, defend and hold CTERA, its affiliates and licensors, each of its and their business partners and each of its and their respective employees, officers, directors and representatives, harmless from and against any and all claims, losses, damages, liabilities, judgments, penalties, fines, costs and expenses (including reasonable attorney fees), arising out of or in connection with any claim arising out of (i) Your use of the Software in a manner not authorized by this Agreement, and/or in violation of the applicable restrictions and/or applicable law, (ii) Your violation of any term or condition of this Agreement or any applicable additional policies, or (iii) Your or Your employees or personnel s negligence or willful misconduct. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 443

22 Legal Information 9.2 CTERA shall promptly notify You of any claim subject to indemnification; provided that CTERA's failure to do so shall not affect Your obligations hereunder, except to the extent that CTERA's failure to promptly notify You materially delays or prejudices Your ability to defend the claim. At CTERA's option, You will have the right to defend against any such claim with counsel of Your own choosing (subject to CTERA's written consent) and to settle such claim as You deem appropriate, provided that You shall not enter into any settlement without CTERA's prior written consent and provided that CTERA may, at any time, elect to take over control of the defense and settlement of the claim. 10. Indemnification by CTERA Notwithstanding CTERA s disclaimer of any warranty of non-infringement as set forth in Section 7 above, in special circumstances, in CTERA s sole discretion, CTERA may choose to indemnify You in accordance with the provisions of this Section 10. 10.1 Indemnification. CTERA may defend or settle, at its option and expense, any action brought by a third party against You, only to the extent such action arises from any third party claim brought against You alleging that the Software infringes any patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret, or other intellectual property right of any third party (the "IP Claim"), and may pay all costs, liabilities, damages and legal fees finally awarded against You in, or paid in settlement of, such action. 10.2 Remedy by CTERA. In the event that any Software or portion thereof is held, or in CTERA s reasonable opinion may be held, to constitute an infringement, CTERA, at its option and expense, may either (i) obtain for You the right to continue to use such Software as contemplated herein, (ii) modify such Software so that it becomes non-infringing, but without materially altering its functionality, (iii) replace such Software with a functionally equivalent non infringing Product, or (iv) terminate this Agreement and provide you with a refund of the amount paid for the infringing Software. 10.3 Exceptions. The foregoing does not apply to claims to the extent arising from: (i) the combination of a Software with other products not supplied by or on behalf of CTERA where such claim would not have arisen from the use of the Software standing alone, (ii) compliance by CTERA with Your specifications, (iii) any modification of the Software not made by or on behalf of CTERA, where such claim would not have arisen but for such modification, or (iv) where You continue an activity where such claim would not have arisen but for such activity after having received and had a commercially reasonable time to install modifications from CTERA that would have completely avoided the activity. 10.4 Entire Liability. This section 10 states the entire liability of CTERA and Your exclusive remedy for any proceedings or claims that the Software infringes or misappropriates a third party's intellectual property, in respect of which CTERA chooses to provide indemnification. 10.5 Requirements for Indemnity. You agrees to provide CTERA with (i) prompt written notice of the IP Claim giving rise to CTERA s indemnity option hereunder, (ii) sole control over the defense or settlement of such claim or action, if CTERA so requests (provided that CTERA shall not, without Your prior written consent, settle any such claim or action if such settlement contains a stipulation to or admission or acknowledgment of any liability or wrongdoing on Your part), and (iii) reasonable information and assistance in the defense and/or settlement any such claim or action at CTERA s option and expense. 11. Miscellaneous Provisions 11.1 The Software may be subject to export control laws of the State of Israel and/or may be subject to additional export control laws applicable to You or in Your jurisdiction. You shall not ship, transfer, or export the Software into any country, or make available or use the Software in any manner, prohibited by law. You warrant and agree that You are not: (i) located in, under the control of, or a national or resident of Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Syria or Sudan, or (ii) on the U.S Treasury Department list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. 11.2 This agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Israel, without giving effect to any conflict of laws and provisions that would require the application of the laws of any other jurisdiction. The parties hereby expressly reject any application to this Agreement of (a) the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods; and (b) the 1974 Convention on the Limitation Period in the International Sale of Goods, as amended by that certain Protocol, done at Vienna on April 11, 1980. 11.3 All disputes arising out of this Agreement will be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the competent courts of Tel Aviv, Israel, and the parties agree and submit to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction and venue of these courts, except that nothing will prohibit CTERA from instituting an action in any court of competent jurisdiction to obtain injunctive relief or protect or enforce its intellectual property rights. 444 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Legal Information 22 11.4 The failure of CTERA to exercise or enforce any right or provision of this Agreement does not constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement will continue in full force and effect. 11.5 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between CTERA and You with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes and replaces all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. Any waiver of any provision of this Agreement will be effective only if in writing and signed by CTERA. 11.6 You may not assign or transfer any of Your rights or obligations under this Agreement to a third party without the prior written consent of CTERA. CTERA may freely assign this Agreement. Any attempted assignment or transfer in violation of the foregoing will be void. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 445

22 Legal Information 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) 446 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Legal Information 22 The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 447

22 Legal Information NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below). "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution." 448 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Legal Information 22 "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions: a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 449

22 Legal Information 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability. PostgreSQL Database Management System (formerly known as Postgres, then as Postgres95) Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2013, The PostgreSQL Global Development Group Portions Copyright (c) 1994, The Regents of the University of California Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, without fee, and without a written agreement is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS NO OBLIGATIONS TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS. 450 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Index A About the CTERA Portal 2 About This Guide 12 Accessing Online Help 25 Accessing the Configuration Template Manager 156, 157, 187 Accessing the Device Manager 190, 192, 195, 197, 198, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206 Accessing the Folder Group Manager 228, 229, 232, 233, 235 Accessing the Folder Manager 209, 211, 215, 227 Accessing the Global Administration View 20, 25 Accessing the Global Administrator Manager 143, 144, 145, 146 Accessing the Home Page 24 Accessing the Server Manager 300, 301, 302, 303, 305, 308, 309 Accessing the Staff Administrator Manager 136, 137, 138, 142 Accessing the User Account Manager 82, 83, 89, 92, 93, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 110 Accessing the User Group Manager 128, 130, 133 Accessing the Virtual Portal Manager 290, 291, 294, 295, 297 Adding Add-ons to User Accounts 93, 270 Adding and Editing Add-ons 88, 270, 275, 293 Adding and Editing Device Configuration Templates 157 Adding and Editing Email Alerts 74, 424, 426 Adding and Editing Excluded Sets 169 Adding and Editing Folder Groups 229, 232 Adding and Editing Folders 194, 211, 213, 214 Adding and Editing Global Administrators 144 Adding and Editing Include Sets 160 Adding and Editing Staff Administrators 137, 140 Adding and Editing Storage Nodes 319, 358 Adding and Editing Subscription Plans 88, 255, 265, 293 Adding and Editing User Accounts 83, 88, 132, 194, 213, 214, 232, 246, 248 Adding and Editing User Groups 91, 130 Adding and Editing Virtual Portals 291, 293 Adding Global Add-ons to Virtual Portals 270, 295 Adding License Keys 39 Adding Seeding Stations 310 Adding Vouchers 270, 279 Apache License 456 Applying Provisioning Changes 109, 111, 267, 276 Applying Skins 46, 79 Assigning User Accounts to Subscription Plans 92, 96 Assigning Virtual Portals to Global Plans 294 At What Level Can a Snapshot Retention Policy Be Applied? 253 B Branding the CTERA Portal 43 Browser Requirements 13 C Canceling a Pending Certificate Request 66 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 451

Index Canceling the Current Cloud Backup 203 Changing Passphrases for Accessing Backup Folder Contents 226 Changing Passphrases for Accessing Folder Group Contents 234 Changing the Right Pane View 217, 218 Clearing Logs 415 Cloud Drive Folder Collaboration Overview 237 Configuring a Server as a Catalog Node 302 Configuring an IP-Based Access Control List 146 Configuring Automatic Firmware Updates 181 Configuring Default Settings for Virtual-Portals 27, 209, 230, 231 Configuring Email Notifications 71, 72, 416, 420 Configuring Event Log Settings 398 Configuring Global Administrator Alerts 145 Configuring Global Messaging Settings 35, 49, 246, 248 Configuring Global Settings 47 Configuring Global Virtual Portal Settings 27 Configuring Group Membership for User Accounts 89, 130 Configuring Logging 397 Configuring Staff Administrator Alerts 138 Configuring Syslog Logging 399 Configuring the Automatic Template Assignment Policy 155, 182, 185, 193 Configuring User Accounts' Advanced Settings 100, 209 Configuring User Alerts 104 Configuring User Group Members 130 Configuring Virtual Portals 75 Contacting Technical Support 12 Copying/Moving Files and Folders 222 Creating Collaboration Projects 242 Creating New Folders 220 Creating Skins 43, 76 CTERA Agents 5, 6 CTERA Cloud Gateways 5, 6 CTERA End User License Agreement 449 CTERA Mobile 5, 6 CTERA Portal Interfaces and Users 4, 5, 6, 85 CTERA Portal Snapshot Retention for the Cloud Backup Service. 255 CTERA Portal Snapshot Retention for the Cloud Drive Service 255 CTERA Provisioning 10 Customizing Administrator Roles 138, 151 Customizing Email Notification Templates 68, 282, 420 Customizing Global Email Notification Templates 68 D Defining Project Management Permissions 239 Deleting Active Guest Invitations 288 Deleting Add-ons 276 Deleting Device Configuration Templates 187 Deleting Devices 206 Deleting Email Alerts 427 Deleting Excluded Sets 171 Deleting Files and Folders 221 Deleting Firmware Images 317 Deleting Folder Groups 235 Deleting Folders 227 Deleting Global Administrators 146 Deleting Included Sets 167 Deleting Seeding Stations 312 Deleting Skins 46, 80 Deleting Staff Administrators 142 Deleting Storage Nodes 358 Deleting Subscription Plans 267 Deleting User Accounts 110 Deleting User Groups 133 Deleting Virtual Portals 297 Deleting Vouchers 283 Downloading Files and Folders 217 Duplicating Configuration Templates 186 452 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Index E Editing Collaboration Projects 246 Editing Device Settings 155, 191, 194, 213 Editing Server General Settings 49, 301 Enabling Projects in a Team Portal 239 Enabling/Disabling Excluded Sets 167 Enabling/Disabling Include Sets 158 Enabling/Disabling User Accounts 108 End-user Provisioning (Reseller Portals) 11 End-user Provisioning (Team Portals) 12 Exporting Add-ons to Excel 276 Exporting Devices to Excel 204 Exporting Folder Groups to Excel 235 Exporting Folders 375 Exporting Folders to Excel 227 Exporting License Keys to Excel 43 Exporting Logs to Excel 414 Exporting Reports to Excel 397 Exporting Subscription Plans to Excel 266 Exporting the Installed SSL Certificate 51, 67 Exporting User Accounts to Excel 108 Exporting Virtual Portals to Excel 297 Exporting Vouchers to Excel 283 F Filtering Logs 412 G Generate a Certificate Signing Request 52, 55, 66 Generating Monthly Reports 107 Getting Started 13 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 453 H How Directory Service Synchronization Works 111 How Team Portals and Reseller Portals Differ 39 How the CTERA Portal License Works 37 I Importing an SSL Certificate 51, 67 Importing and Exporting Folders (Seeding) 361 Importing Folders Over NFS 361 Importing Global Administrators from a File 149 Importing Staff Administrators from a File 140 Importing the Seeding Drive 373 Install the Signed Certificate on CTERA Portal 51, 52, 64 Installing an SSL Certificate 52 Integrating CTERA Portal with an Active Directory Domain, Tree, or Forest 112 Integrating CTERA Portal with an LDAP Directory Server 119 Introduction 1 L Legal Information 2, 449 Logging in to the Administration Control Panel 14, 18 Logging in to the CTERA Portal 14 Logging in to the End User Portal 14, 16 Logging in to the Staff Control Panel 14 Logging Out 24, 26 M Management Features 3 Managing Add-ons 251, 269 Managing Administrators 135, 401, 409, 410 Managing Backup Folders for Folder Groups 233 Managing Certificates 51 Managing Cloud Drive Folders for Folder Groups 232 Managing Cloud Drive Folders Owned by User Accounts 103 Managing Collaboration Projects 104, 237 Managing Device Configuration Templates 155, 191 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 453

Index Managing Devices 189 Managing Devices for User Accounts 99 Managing Firmware Images 313 Managing Folder Contents 216, 233, 234 Managing Folder Groups for User Accounts 100 Managing Folders and Folder Groups 207 Managing Guest Invitations 285 Managing Seeding Stations 310, 373 Managing Servers 299 Managing Storage Nodes 319 Managing Subscription Plans 251 Managing the CTERA Portal License 36 Managing User Accounts 81, 196, 212, 231 Managing User Groups 89, 128 Managing Virtual Portals 289 Managing Vouchers 31, 279 Manually Fetching User Data 111, 125 Manually Starting Cloud Backup 203 Marking a Firmware Image as the Current Firmware Image 180, 316 Monitoring Server Activity 303 Monitoring the CTERA Portal 379 N Navigating Between Folders 216, 217, 218, 220, 221, 222 Navigating between Table Pages 23 Navigating between Virtual Portals 18, 20, 24, 47 Note your Portal's DNS Suffix 52, 54 O Obtain an SSL Certificate 52, 53 Opening Menu Sections 21 Organization and Naming of Shared Cloud Folders 238 Overriding Global Branding Settings 43, 76 Overriding the Global Virtual Portal Settings 28, 75, 86, 108, 209, 279, 415, 423 P Performing Seeding at the Customer Premises 362, 372 Portal-level Provisioning 10 PostgreSQL Database Management System (formerly known as Postgres, then as Postgres95) 458 Preparing for Seeding 362 Provisioning User Accounts in Reseller Portals 92 Provisioning User Accounts in Team Portals 96 R Recovering CTERA Cloud Gateways after Hard Drive Failures 429 Recovering from Cloud Gateway Failures 429, 434 Recovering from Hard Drive Failures 429, 430 Recovering from Total Loss of a Cloud Gateway 429, 440 Refreshing Page Contents 24 Refreshing the View 217 Remote Wiping Mobile Devices 205 Remotely Managing Devices and Their Files 153, 202, 235 Remotely Performing Cloud Backup Operations on Devices 203 Removing License Keys 40 Removing the Current Skin Selection 46 Removing the Currently Applied Skin 80 Renaming Files and Folders 221 Restarting Servers 65, 309 Restoring Files and Folders to Devices 222 Restricting Throughput 175 Resuming the Cloud Backup Service 204 Reverting to Email Notification Default Settings 423 S Scheduling Automatic Cloud Backup 172 454 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide

Index Searching for Files 224 Searching Tables 23, 317 Selecting Applications for Backup 171 Selecting CTERA Portal Cloud Drive Folders for Synchronization 177 Selecting Files and Folders 218, 221, 222 Sending Vouchers by Email 282 Setting the Default Device Configuration Template 185 Setting/Removing the Default Subscription Plan 266 Sign the Certificate Request 52, 61 Snapshot Consolidation 255 Sorting Tables 22, 217 Storage Clients 5 Suspending the Cloud Backup Service 204 T Terminating User Accounts 98 The Main Frame 22 The Navigation Pane 21 The Status Bar 24 U Understanding Snapshot Retention Policies 10, 11, 252, 258 Uploading Files 218 Uploading Firmware Images 314 Uploading Skins 43, 77 Using a Caringo Storage Node 320, 324 Using a Cleversafe Storage Node 320, 328 Using a Cloudian Storage Node 320, 329 Using a CTERA Cloud FS Storage Node 320, 331 Using a DDN Web Object Scaler (WOS) Storage Node 320, 338 Using a Dell DX Object Storage Platform Storage Node 320, 333 Using a Hitachi Content Platform Storage Node 321, 346 Using a Scality (S3 API) Storage Node 321, 354 Using a Scality RING Storage Node 321, 356 Using an Amazon S3 Storage Node 320, 322 Using an EMC Atmos Storage Node 321, 340 Using an EMC Isilon (NFS) Storage Node 321, 341 Using an EMC ViPR (Atmos) Storage Node 321, 343 Using an EMC ViPR (S3) Storage Node 321, 344 Using an IBM GPFS Storage Node 321, 348 Using an OpenStack Swift (KeyStone) Storage Node 321, 352 Using an OpenStack Swift Storage Node 321, 350 Using CTERA Portal Email Notifications 415 Using Directory Services 110 Using Email Alerts 423 Using the CTERA Portal 20 V Validate and Prepare Certificates for Upload 52, 63 Viewing Access Logs 285, 407 Viewing Active Guest Invitations 286 Viewing Add-ons 275 Viewing Agent Logs 411 Viewing All Backup Folders 212 Viewing All Cloud Drive Folders 213 Viewing All Devices 193 Viewing Audit Logs 409 Viewing Cloud Backup Logs 198, 403 Viewing Cloud Sync Logs 406 Viewing Collaboration Project Contents 248 Viewing Connected Devices 302 Viewing CTERA Portal License Information 41 Viewing Device Configuration Templates 158 Viewing Devices 193 Viewing Devices that Use a Specific Firmware Image 317 Viewing Email Alerts 426 Viewing File or Folder Details 217 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide 455

Index Viewing Firmware Images 316 Viewing Folder Contents 214, 216, 226 Viewing Folder Groups 232 Viewing Folders 212 Viewing Global Administrators 145 Viewing Individual Cloud Gateway's Storage Status 198 Viewing Individual Devices' Backup Status 197 Viewing Individual Devices' Statuses 194, 195 Viewing Local Backup Logs 402 Viewing Logs 400 Viewing Previous Versions of Files and Folders 225 Viewing Reports 383, 397 Viewing Seeding Stations 311 Viewing Server Tasks 305 Viewing Servers' Statuses 308 Viewing Skins 45, 79 Viewing Staff Administrators 140, 145 Viewing Storage Nodes 357 Viewing Subscription Plans 264 Viewing System Logs 401 Viewing the Add-Ons, Global Add-ons, or Add-ons by Portal Report 391 Viewing the Devices Report 387 Viewing the Folder Groups Report 385 Viewing the Folders Report 384 Viewing the Plans, Global Plans, or Plans by Portal Report 389 Viewing the Portals Report 394 Viewing the Status Dashboard 379 Viewing the Storage Report 393 Viewing User Account Details 105 Viewing User Accounts 87 Viewing User Groups 129 Viewing Virtual Portals 292 Viewing Vouchers 281 Virtual Portals 4, 289, 292 W What Does a Snapshot Retention Policy Specify? 252 What Happens When Both Levels of Snapshot Retention Policy Are Applied? 254 Working with Backup Sets 158 456 CTERA Portal Datacenter Edition Administrator Guide